Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisIntroduction to Graphics Communications for Engineers, Fifth Edition, is a workbook that teaches the fundamentals of sketching and engineering graphics principles in addition to improving the visualization abilities of students. The primary goal of this text is to assist students in learning the techniques and standards of communicating graphically so that design ideas can be clearly communicated and produced. This introductory text is for students in technical drawing and engineering graphics courses at both two- and four-year schools.Table of Contents1 Introduction to Graphics Communications2 Sketching and Text3 Section and Auxiliary Views4 Dimensioning and Tolerancing5 Reading and Constructing6 Design and 3-D ModelingSupplement Design ProblemsAdditional Problems and WorksheetsAppendix: Decimal and Millimeter EquivalentsIndex

Read more less

Book SynopsisProfessional CUDA Programming in C provides down to earth coverage of the complex topic of parallel computing, a topic increasingly essential in every day computing. This entry-level programming book for professionals turns complex subjects into easy-to-comprehend concepts and easy-to-follows steps.Table of ContentsForeword xvii Preface xix Introduction xxi Chapter 1: Heterogeneous Parallel Computing with CUDA 1 Parallel Computing 2 Sequential and Parallel Programming 3 Parallelism 4 Computer Architecture 6 Heterogeneous Computing 8 Heterogeneous Architecture 9 Paradigm of Heterogeneous Computing 12 CUDA: A Platform for Heterogeneous Computing 14 Hello World from GPU 17 Is CUDA C Programming Difficult? 20 Summary 21 Chapter 2: CUDA Programming Model 23 Introducing the CUDA Programming Model 23 CUDA Programming Structure 25 Managing Memory 26 Organizing Threads 30 Launching a CUDA Kernel 36 Writing Your Kernel 37 Verifying Your Kernel 39 Handling Errors 40 Compiling and Executing 40 Timing Your Kernel 43 Timing with CPU Timer 44 Timing with nvprof 47 Organizing Parallel Threads 49 Indexing Matrices with Blocks and Threads 49 Summing Matrices with a 2D Grid and 2D Blocks 53 Summing Matrices with a 1D Grid and 1D Blocks 57 Summing Matrices with a 2D Grid and 1D Blocks 58 Managing Devices 60 Using the Runtime API to Query GPU Information 61 Determining the Best GPU 63 Using nvidia-smi to Query GPU Information 63 Setting Devices at Runtime 64 Summary 65 Chapter 3: CUDA Execution Model 67 Introducing the CUDA Execution Model 67 GPU Architecture Overview 68 The Fermi Architecture 71 The Kepler Architecture 73 Profile-Driven Optimization 78 Understanding the Nature of Warp Execution 80 Warps and Thread Blocks 80 Warp Divergence 82 Resource Partitioning 87 Latency Hiding 90 Occupancy 93 Synchronization 97 Scalability 98 Exposing Parallelism 98 Checking Active Warps with nvprof 100 Checking Memory Operations with nvprof 100 Exposing More Parallelism 101 Avoiding Branch Divergence 104 The Parallel Reduction Problem 104 Divergence in Parallel Reduction 106 Improving Divergence in Parallel Reduction 110 Reducing with Interleaved Pairs 112 Unrolling Loops 114 Reducing with Unrolling 115 Reducing with Unrolled Warps 117 Reducing with Complete Unrolling 119 Reducing with Template Functions 120 Dynamic Parallelism 122 Nested Execution 123 Nested Hello World on the GPU 124 Nested Reduction 128 Summary 132 Chapter 4: Global Memory 135 Introducing the CUDA Memory Model 136 Benefits of a Memory Hierarchy 136 CUDA Memory Model 137 Memory Management 145 Memory Allocation and Deallocation 146 Memory Transfer 146 Pinned Memory 148 Zero-Copy Memory 150 Unified Virtual Addressing 156 Unified Memory 157 Memory Access Patterns 158 Aligned and Coalesced Access 158 Global Memory Reads 160 Global Memory Writes 169 Array of Structures versus Structure of Arrays 171 Performance Tuning 176 What Bandwidth Can a Kernel Achieve? 179 Memory Bandwidth 179 Matrix Transpose Problem 180 Matrix Addition with Unified Memory 195 Summary 199 Chapter 5: Shared Memory and Constant Memory 203 Introducing CUDA Shared Memory 204 Shared Memory 204 Shared Memory Allocation 206 Shared Memory Banks and Access Mode 206 Configuring the Amount of Shared Memory 212 Synchronization 214 Checking the Data Layout of Shared Memory 216 Square Shared Memory 217 Rectangular Shared Memory 225 Reducing Global Memory Access 232 Parallel Reduction with Shared Memory 232 Parallel Reduction with Unrolling 236 Parallel Reduction with Dynamic Shared Memory 238 Effective Bandwidth 239 Coalescing Global Memory Accesses 239 Baseline Transpose Kernel 240 Matrix Transpose with Shared Memory 241 Matrix Transpose with Padded Shared Memory 245 Matrix Transpose with Unrolling 246 Exposing More Parallelism 249 Constant Memory 250 Implementing a 1D Stencil with Constant Memory 250 Comparing with the Read-Only Cache 253 The Warp Shuffle Instruction 255 Variants of the Warp Shuffle Instruction 256 Sharing Data within a Warp 258 Parallel Reduction Using the Warp Shuffle Instruction 262 Summary 264 Chapter 6: Streams and Concurrency 267 Introducing Streams and Events 268 CUDA Streams 269 Stream Scheduling 271 Stream Priorities 273 CUDA Events 273 Stream Synchronization 275 Concurrent Kernel Execution 279 Concurrent Kernels in Non-NULL Streams 279 False Dependencies on Fermi GPUs 281 Dispatching Operations with OpenMP 283 Adjusting Stream Behavior Using Environment Variables 284 Concurrency-Limiting GPU Resources 286 Blocking Behavior of the Default Stream 287 Creating Inter-Stream Dependencies 288 Overlapping Kernel Execution and Data Transfer 289 Overlap Using Depth-First Scheduling 289 Overlap Using Breadth-First Scheduling 293 Overlapping GPU and CPU Execution 294 Stream Callbacks 295 Summary 297 Chapter 7: Tuning Instruction-Level Primitives 299 Introducing CUDA Instructions 300 Floating-Point Instructions 301 Intrinsic and Standard Functions 303 Atomic Instructions 304 Optimizing Instructions for Your Application 306 Single-Precision vs. Double-Precision 306 Standard vs. Intrinsic Functions 309 Understanding Atomic Instructions 315 Bringing It All Together 322 Summary 324 Chapter 8: GPU-Accelerated CUDA Libraries and OpenACC 327 Introducing the CUDA Libraries 328 Supported Domains for CUDA Libraries 329 A Common Library Workflow 330 The CUSPARSE Library 332 cuSPARSE Data Storage Formats 333 Formatting Conversion with cuSPARSE 337 Demonstrating cuSPARSE 338 Important Topics in cuSPARSE Development 340 cuSPARSE Summary 341 The cuBLAS Library 341 Managing cuBLAS Data 342 Demonstrating cuBLAS 343 Important Topics in cuBLAS Development 345 cuBLAS Summary 346 The cuFFT Library 346 Using the cuFFT API 347 Demonstrating cuFFT 348 cuFFT Summary 349 The cuRAND Library 349 Choosing Pseudo- or Quasi- Random Numbers 349 Overview of the cuRAND Library 350 Demonstrating cuRAND 354 Important Topics in cuRAND Development 357 CUDA Library Features Introduced in CUDA 6 358 Drop-In CUDA Libraries 358 Multi-GPU Libraries 359 A Survey of CUDA Library Performance 361 cuSPARSE versus MKL 361 cuBLAS versus MKL BLAS 362 cuFFT versus FFTW versus MKL 363 CUDA Library Performance Summary 364 Using OpenACC 365 Using OpenACC Compute Directives 367 Using OpenACC Data Directives 375 The OpenACC Runtime API 380 Combining OpenACC and the CUDA Libraries 382 Summary of OpenACC 384 Summary 384 Chapter 9: Multi-GPU Programming 387 Moving to Multiple GPUs 388 Executing on Multiple GPUs 389 Peer-to-Peer Communication 391 Synchronizing across Multi-GPUs 392 Subdividing Computation across Multiple GPUs 393 Allocating Memory on Multiple Devices 393 Distributing Work from a Single Host Thread 394 Compiling and Executing 395 Peer-to-Peer Communication on Multiple GPUs 396 Enabling Peer-to-Peer Access 396 Peer-to-Peer Memory Copy 396 Peer-to-Peer Memory Access with Unified Virtual Addressing 398 Finite Difference on Multi-GPU 400 Stencil Calculation for 2D Wave Equation 400 Typical Patterns for Multi-GPU Programs 401 2D Stencil Computation with Multiple GPUs 403 Overlapping Computation and Communication 405 Compiling and Executing 406 Scaling Applications across GPU Clusters 409 CPU-to-CPU Data Transfer 410 GPU-to-GPU Data Transfer Using Traditional MPI 413 GPU-to-GPU Data Transfer with CUDA-aware MPI 416 Intra-Node GPU-to-GPU Data Transfer with CUDA-Aware MPI 417 Adjusting Message Chunk Size 418 GPU to GPU Data Transfer with GPUDirect RDMA 419 Summary 422 Chapter 10: Implementation Considerations 425 The CUDA C Development Process 426 APOD Development Cycle 426 Optimization Opportunities 429 CUDA Code Compilation 432 CUDA Error Handling 437 Profile-Driven Optimization 438 Finding Optimization Opportunities Using nvprof 439 Guiding Optimization Using nvvp 443 NVIDIA Tools Extension 446 CUDA Debugging 448 Kernel Debugging 448 Memory Debugging 456 Debugging Summary 462 A Case Study in Porting C Programs to CUDA C 462 Assessing crypt 463 Parallelizing crypt 464 Optimizing crypt 465 Deploying Crypt 472 Summary of Porting crypt 475 Summary 476 Appendix: Suggested Readings 477 Index 481

Read more less

Book SynopsisPhysics of Energy Sourcesprovides readers with a balanced presentation of the fundamental physics needed to understand and analyze conventional and renewable energy sources including nuclear, solar, wind and water power. It also presents various ways in which energy can be stored for future use.Table of ContentsEditors’ preface to the Manchester Physics Series xi Author’s preface xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Energy consumption 1 1.2 Energy sources 3 1.3 Renewable and non-renewable energy sources 5 1.4 The form and conversion of energy 6 1.4.1 Thermal energy sources 7 1.4.2 Mechanical energy sources 7 1.4.3 Photovoltaic sources 7 1.4.4 Energy storage 8 Problems 1 9 2 The atomic nucleus 11 2.1 The composition and properties of nuclei 12 2.1.1 The composition of nuclei 12 2.1.2 The size of a nucleus 14 2.1.3 The distributions of nuclear matter and charge 19 2.1.4 The mass of a nucleus 21 2.1.5 The charge of a nucleus 24 2.1.6 Nuclear binding energy 27 2.1.7 Binding energy curve of the nuclides 30 2.1.8 The semi-empirical mass formula 32 2.2 Nuclear forces and energies 35 2.2.1 Characteristics of the nuclear force 35 2.2.2 Nuclear energies 36 2.2.3 Quantum mechanical description of a particle in a potential well 39 2.3 Radioactivity and nuclear stability 47 2.3.1 Segré chart of the stable nuclides 48 2.3.2 Decay laws of radioactivity 49 2.3.3 α, β and γ decay 57 Problems 2 67 3 Nuclear power 71 3.1 How to get energy from the nucleus 71 3.2 Nuclear reactions 73 3.2.1 Nuclear reactions 73 3.2.2 Q-value of a nuclear reaction 74 3.2.3 Reaction cross-sections and reaction rates 76 3.3 Nuclear fission 82 3.3.1 Liquid-drop model of nuclear fission 83 3.3.2 Induced nuclear fission 86 3.3.3 Fission cross-sections 87 3.3.4 Fission reactions and products 88 3.3.5 Energy in fission 90 3.3.6 Moderation of fast neutrons 92 3.3.7 Uranium enrichment 93 3.4 Controlled fission reactions 97 3.4.1 Chain reactions 97 3.4.2 Control of fission reactions 101 3.4.3 Fission reactors 103 3.4.4 Commercial nuclear reactors 105 3.4.5 Nuclear waste 107 3.5 Nuclear fusion 109 3.5.1 Fusion reactions 110 3.5.2 Energy in fusion 111 3.5.3 Coulomb barrier for nuclear fusion 113 3.5.4 Fusion reaction rates 113 3.5.5 Performance criteria 115 3.5.6 Controlled thermonuclear fusion 117 Problems 3 123 4 Solar power 127 4.1 Stellar fusion 128 4.1.1 Star formation and evolution 128 4.1.2 Thermonuclear fusion in the Sun: the proton–proton cycle 131 4.1.3 Solar radiation 132 4.2 Blackbody radiation 134 4.2.1 Laws of blackbody radiation 135 4.2.2 Emissivity 137 4.2.3 Birth of the photon 141 4.3 Solar radiation and its interaction with the Earth 145 4.3.1 Characteristics of solar radiation 145 4.3.2 Interaction of solar radiation with Earth and its atmosphere 147 4.3.3 Penetration of solar energy into the ground 155 4.4 Geothermal energy 159 4.4.1 Shallow geothermal energy 160 4.4.2 Deep geothermal energy 161 4.5 Solar heaters 162 4.5.1 Solar water heaters 162 4.5.2 Heat transfer processes 165 4.5.3 Solar thermal power systems 172 4.6 Heat engines: converting heat into work 174 4.6.1 Equation of state of an ideal gas 175 4.6.2 Internal energy, work and heat: the first law of thermodynamics 177 4.6.3 Specific heats of gases 181 4.6.4 Isothermal and adiabatic expansion 183 4.6.5 Heat engines and the second law of thermodynamics 185 Problems 4 196 5 Semiconductor solar cells 201 5.1 Introduction 201 5.2 Semiconductors 204 5.2.1 The band structure of crystalline solids 204 5.2.2 Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors 208 5.3 The p–n junction 214 5.3.1 The p–n junction in equilibrium 214 5.3.2 The biased p–n junction 217 5.3.3 The current–voltage characteristic of a p–n junction 219 5.3.4 Electron and hole concentrations in a semiconductor 222 5.3.5 The Fermi energy in a p–n junction 227 5.4 Semiconductor solar cells 229 5.4.1 Photon absorption at a p–n junction 229 5.4.2 Power generation by a solar cell 231 5.4.3 Maximum power delivery from a solar cell 235 5.4.4 The Shockley–Queisser limit 238 5.4.5 Solar cell construction 240 5.4.6 Increasing the efficiency of solar cells and alternative solar cell materials 243 Problems 5 248 6 Wind power 251 6.1 A brief history of wind power 251 6.2 Origin and directions of the wind 253 6.2.1 The Coriolis force 253 6.3 The flow of ideal fluids 256 6.3.1 The continuity equation 257 6.3.2 Bernoulli’s equation 258 6.4 Extraction of wind power by a turbine 263 6.4.1 The Betz criterion 265 6.4.2 Action of wind turbine blades 268 6.5 Wind turbine design and operation 271 6.6 Siting of a wind turbine 277 Problems 6 280 7 Water power 283 7.1 Hydroelectric power 284 7.1.1 The hydroelectric plant and its principles of operation 284 7.1.2 Flow of a viscous fluid in a pipe 286 7.1.3 Hydroelectric turbines 288 7.2 Wave power 291 7.2.1 Wave motion 292 7.2.2 Water waves 306 7.2.3 Wave energy converters 319 7.3 Tidal power 324 7.3.1 Origin of the tides 325 7.3.2 Variation and enhancement of tidal range 335 7.3.3 Harnessing tidal power 341 Problems 7 346 8 Energy storage 349 8.1 Types of energy storage 350 8.2 Chemical energy storage 351 8.2.1 Biological energy storage 351 8.2.2 Hydrogen energy storage 351 8.3 Thermal energy storage 352 8.4 Mechanical energy storage 355 8.4.1 Pumped hydroelectric energy storage 355 8.4.2 Compressed air energy storage 357 8.4.3 Flywheel energy storage 361 8.5 Electrical energy storage 364 8.5.1 Capacitors and super-capacitors 365 8.5.2 Superconducting magnetic storage 367 8.5.3 Rechargeable batteries 368 8.5.4 Fuel cells 370 8.6 Distribution of electrical power 372 Problems 8 374 Solutions to problems 377 Index 397

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn in-depth exploration of shipboard power generation and distribution system design that utilizes variable frequency drives The variable frequency drive (VFD) application is a proven technology for shore-based applications. However, shore-based VFDs often are unsuitable for shipboard applications because the power generation and distribution fundamentals are completely different.VFD Challenges for Shipboard Electrical Power System Designexplores the problems presented by variable frequency drives as they are applied in shipboard power generation and distribution system design and offers solutions for meeting these challenges. VFDs with configurations such as six pulse drive, 12 pulse drive, 18 pulse drive, active front end, pulse width modulation and many others generate many different levels of harmonics. These harmonics are often much higher than the regulations allow. This book covers a range of techniques used to provide ships with efficient energy that minimizes mechanical andTable of ContentsPreface ix About the Author xiii 1 Overview – VFD Motor Controller 1 2 Propulsion System Adjustable Speed Drive 21 3 VFD Motor Controller for Ship Service Auxiliaries 29 4 Shipboard Power System with LVDC and MVDC for AC and DC Application 35 5 Shipboard VFD Application and System Grounding 39 6 Shipboard Power Quality and VFD Effect 69 7 Shipboard Power System FMEA for VFD Motor Controller 85 8 Shipboard VFD Cable Selection, Installation, and Termination 97 9 Ship Smart System Design (S3D) and Digital Twin 117 Appendices 129 Glossary 135 Bibliography 143 Index 145

Read more less

Book SynopsisBased on the author's industry experience and collaborative works with other industries, Control of Electric Machine Drive System is packed with implemented, tested, and verified ideas that relate to everyday problems in the field.Trade Review"The book's practicality and realworld relatability make it an invaluable resource for professionals and engineers involved in the research and development of electric machine drive business, industrial drive designers, and senior undergraduate and graduate students." (Trading-house.net, 7 March 2011)Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Electric Machine Drive System 4 1.1.2 Trend of Development of Electric Machine Drive System 5 1.1.3 Trend of Development of Power Semiconductor 7 1.1.4 Trend of Development of Control Electronics 8 1.2 Basics of Mechanics 8 1.2.1 Basic Laws 9 1.2.2 Force and Torque 9 1.2.3 Moment of Inertia of a Rotating Body 11 1.2.4 Equations of Motion for a Rigid Body 13 1.2.5 Power and Energy 17 1.2.6 Continuity of Physical Variables 18 1.3 Torque Speed Curve of Typical Mechanical Loads 18 1.3.1 Fan, Pump, and Blower 18 1.3.2 Hoisting Load; Crane, Elevator 20 1.3.3 Traction Load (Electric Vehicle, Electric Train) 21 1.3.4 Tension Control Load 23 Problems 24 References 35 2 Basic Structure and Modeling of Electric Machines and Power Converters 36 2.1 Structure and Modeling of DC Machine 36 2.2 Analysis of Steady-State Operation 41 2.2.1 Separately Excited Shunt Machine 42 2.2.2 Series Excited DC Machine 45 2.3 Analysis of Transient State of DC Machine 46 2.3.1 Separately Excited Shunt Machine 47 2.4 Power Electronic Circuit to Drive DC Machine 50 2.4.1 Static Ward–Leonard System 51 2.4.2 Four-Quadrants Chopper System 52 2.5 Rotating Magnetic Motive Force 53 2.6 Steady-State Analysis of a Synchronous Machine 58 2.7 Linear Electric Machine 62 2.8 Capability Curve of Synchronous Machine 63 2.8.1 Round Rotor Synchronous Machine with Field Winding 63 2.8.2 Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine 64 2.9 Parameter Variation of Synchronous Machine 66 2.9.1 Stator and Field Winding Resistance 66 2.9.2 Synchronous Inductance 66 2.9.3 Back EMF Constant 67 2.10 Steady-State Analysis of Induction Machine 70 2.10.1 Steady-State Equivalent Circuit of an Induction Machine 72 2.10.2 Constant Air Gap Flux Operation 77 2.11 Generator Operation of an Induction Machine 79 2.12 Variation of Parameters of an Induction Machine 81 2.12.1 Variation of Rotor Resistance, Rr 81 2.12.2 Variation of Rotor Leakage Inductance, Llr 82 2.12.3 Variation of Stator Resistance, Rs 82 2.12.4 Variation of Stator Leakage Inductance, Lls 83 2.12.5 Variation of Excitation Inductance, Lm 84 2.12.6 Variation of Resistance Representing Iron Loss, Rm 84 2.13 Classification of Induction Machines According to Speed–Torque Characteristics 84 2.14 Quasi-Transient State Analysis 87 2.15 Capability Curve of an Induction Machine 88 2.16 Comparison of AC Machine and DC Machine 90 2.16.1 Comparison of a Squirrel Cage Induction Machine and a Separately Excited DC Machine 90 2.16.2 Comparison of a Permanent Magnet AC Machine and a Separately Excited DC Machine 92 2.17 Variable-Speed Control of Induction Machine Based on Steady-State Characteristics 92 2.17.1 Variable Speed Control of Induction Machine by Controlling Terminal Voltage 93 2.17.2 Variable Speed Control of Induction Machine Based on Constant Air-Gap Flux (͌≈V=F) Control 94 2.17.3 Variable Speed Control of Induction Machine Based on Actual Speed Feedback 95 2.17.4 Enhancement of Constant Air-Gap Flux Control with Feedback of Magnitude of Stator Current 96 2.18 Modeling of Power Converters 96 2.18.1 Three-Phase Diode/Thyristor Rectifier 97 2.18.2 PWM Boost Rectifier 98 2.18.3 Two-Quadrants Bidirectional DC/DC Converter 101 2.18.4 Four-Quadrants DC/DC Converter 102 2.18.5 Three-Phase PWM Inverter 103 2.18.6 Matrix Converter 105 2.19 Parameter Conversion Using Per Unit Method 106 Problems 108 References 114 3 Reference Frame Transformation and Transient State Analysis of Three-Phase AC Machines 116 3.1 Complex Vector 117 3.2 d–q–n Modeling of an Induction Machine Based on Complex Space Vector 119 3.2.1 Equivalent Circuit of an Induction Machine at d–q–n AXIS 120 3.2.2 Torque of the Induction Machine 125 3.3 d–q–n Modeling of a Synchronous Machine Based on Complex Space Vector 128 3.3.1 Equivalent Circuit of a Synchronous Machine at d–q–n AXIS 128 3.3.2 Torque of a Synchronous Machine 138 3.3.3 Equivalent Circuit and Torque of a Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine 140 3.3.4 Synchronous Reluctance Machine (SynRM) 144 Problems 146 References 153 4 Design of Regulators for Electric Machines and Power Converters 154 4.1 Active Damping 157 4.2 Current Regulator 158 4.2.1 Measurement of Current 158 4.2.2 Current Regulator for Three-Phase-Controlled Rectifier 161 4.2.3 Current Regulator for a DC Machine Driven by a PWM Chopper 166 4.2.4 Anti-Wind-Up 170 4.2.5 AC Current Regulator 173 4.3 Speed Regulator 179 4.3.1 Measurement of Speed/Position of Rotor of an Electric Machine 179 4.3.2 Estimation of Speed with Incremental Encoder 182 4.3.3 Estimation of Speed by a State Observer 189 4.3.4 PI/IP Speed Regulator 198 4.3.5 Enhancement of Speed Control Performance with Acceleration Information 204 4.3.6 Speed Regulator with Anti-Wind-Up Controller 206 4.4 Position Regulator 208 4.4.1 Proportional–Proportional and Integral (P–PI) Regulator 208 4.4.2 Feed-Forwarding of Speed Reference and Acceleration Reference 209 4.5 Detection of Phase Angle of AC Voltage 210 4.5.1 Detection of Phase Angle on Synchronous Reference Frame 210 4.5.2 Detection of Phase Angle Using Positive Sequence Voltage on Synchronous Reference Frame 213 4.6 Voltage Regulator 215 4.6.1 Voltage Regulator for DC Link of PWM Boost Rectifier 215 Problems 218 References 228 5 Vector Control 230 5.1 Instantaneous Torque Control 231 5.1.1 Separately Excited DC Machine 231 5.1.2 Surface-Mounted Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor (SMPMSM) 233 5.1.3 Interior Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor (IPMSM) 235 5.2 Vector Control of Induction Machine 236 5.2.1 Direct Vector Control 237 5.2.2 Indirect Vector Control 243 5.3 Rotor Flux Linkage Estimator 245 5.3.1 Voltage Model Based on Stator Voltage Equation of an Induction Machine 245 5.3.2 Current Model Based on Rotor Voltage Equation of an Induction Machine 246 5.3.3 Hybrid Rotor Flux Linkage Estimator 247 5.3.4 Enhanced Hybrid Estimator 248 5.4 Flux Weakening Control 249 5.4.1 Constraints of Voltage and Current to AC Machine 249 5.4.2 Operating Region of Permanent Magnet AC Machine in Current Plane at Rotor Reference Frame 250 5.4.3 Flux Weakening Control of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine 257 5.4.4 Flux Weakening Control of Induction Machine 262 5.4.5 Flux Regulator of Induction Machine 267 Problems 269 References 281 6 Position/Speed Sensorless Control of AC Machines 283 6.1 Sensorless Control of Induction Machine 286 6.1.1 Model Reference Adaptive System (MRAS) 286 6.1.2 Adaptive Speed Observer (ASO) 291 6.2 Sensorless Control of Surface-Mounted Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine (SMPMSM) 297 6.3 Sensorless Control of Interior Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine (IPMSM) 299 6.4 Sensorless Control Employing High-Frequency Signal Injection 302 6.4.1. Inherently Salient Rotor Machine 304 6.4.2 AC Machine with Nonsalient Rotor 305 Problems 317 References 320 7 Practical Issues 324 7.1 Output Voltage Distortion Due to Dead Time and Its Compensation 324 7.1.1 Compensation of Dead Time Effect 325 7.1.2 Zero Current Clamping (ZCC) 327 7.1.3 Voltage Distortion Due to Stray Capacitance of Semiconductor Switches 327 7.1.4 Prediction of Switching Instant 330 7.2 Measurement of Phase Current 334 7.2.1 Modeling of Time Delay of Current Measurement System 334 7.2.2 Offset and Scale Errors in Current Measurement 337 7.3 Problems Due to Digital Signal Processing of Current Regulation Loop 342 7.3.1 Modeling and Compensation of Current Regulation Error Due to Digital Delay 342 7.3.2 Error in Current Sampling 346 Problems 350 References 353 Appendix A Measurement and Estimation of Parameters of Electric Machinery 354 A.1 Parameter Estimation 354 A.1.1 DC Machine 355 A.1.2 Estimation of Parameters of Induction Machine 357 A.2 Parameter Estimation of Electric Machines Using Regulators of Drive System 361 A.2.1 Feedback Control System 361 A.2.2 Back EMF Constant of DC Machine, K 363 A.2.3 Stator Winding Resistance of Three-Phase AC Machine, Rs 363 A.2.4 Induction Machine Parameters 365 A.2.5 Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine 370 A.3 Estimation of Mechanical Parameters 374 A.3.1 Estimation Based on Mechanical Equation 374 A.3.2 Estimation Using Integral Process 376 References 380 Appendix B d–q Modeling Using Matrix Equations 381 B.1 Reference Frame and Transformation Matrix 381 B.2 d–q Modeling of Induction Machine Using Transformation Matrix 386 B.3 d–q Modeling of Synchronous Machine Using Transformation Matrix 390 Index 391 IEEE Press Series on Power Engineering 401

Read more less

Book SynopsisPublisher's Note: Products purchased from Third Party sellers are not guaranteed by the publisher for quality, authenticity, or access to any online entitlements included with the product.BUILD, CONVERT, OR BUY A STATE-OF-THE-ART ELECTRIC VEHICLEThoroughly revised and expanded, Build Your Own Electric Vehicle, Third Edition, is your go-to guide for converting an internal combustion engine vehicle to electric or building an EV from the ground up. You'll also find out about the wide variety of EVs available for purchase and how they're being built. This new editiondetails all the latest breakthroughs, including AC propulsion and regenerative braking systems, intelligent controllers, batteries, and charging technologies.Filled with updated photos, this cutting-edge resource fully Table of ContentsChapter 1. Why Electric VehiclesWhat are Electric VehiclesNew Electricity Rates/Oil costsConversion costsChapter 2. Electric Vehicle BenefitsReports from the US Dept. of EnergyChapter 3. Electric Vehicle (recent) History Toyota's hybrid drive technologyGM and CARBFord and TH!NK CityTesla RoadsterChapter 4. Drive Systems, Chassis, and DesignsLithium Nono-phosphatesIntelligent Drive SystemsChapter 5. Sources, Parts, Conversion Companies and ExpertsUpdates on everything from previous edition, plus links to an online companion site that will be updated every 3 months or so for new informationChapter 6. Calculating Torque CurvesSoftware from Grassroots electric vehicles, Electric Vehicles of America, and NetGain technologiesChapter 7. Electric MotorsAC and DCMetric Mind CorporationAnaheim AutomationHi Performance Electric Vehicle SystemsAC PropulsionTesla MototrsWARP MotorsChapter 8. ControllersChapter 9. BatteriesLithiumLithium-polyphosphateNickelChapter 10. ChargersNewer, standardized SAE systemsChapter 11. AC/DC Drive and Controller PackagesLead Acid conversionsLithium Polymer conversionsChapter 12. Visions for Future Electric Cars and Electric Car Conversions

Read more less

Book SynopsisPublisher's Note: Products purchased from Third Party sellers are not guaranteed by the publisher for quality, authenticity, or access to any online entitlements included with the product.Add some SPARK to your study of ELECTRICITYHaving trouble understanding the fundamentals of electricity? Problem solved! Electricity Demystified, Second Edition, makes it shockingly easy to learn the basic concepts.Written in a step-by-step format, this practical guide begins by covering direct current (DC), voltage, resistance, circuits, cells, and batteries. The book goes on to discuss alternating current (AC), power supplies, wire, and cable. Magnetism and electromagnetic effects are also addressed. Detailed examples and concise explanations make it easy to understand the material. End-of-chapter quizzes and a final exam help reinforce key concepts.It's a no-brainer! You'll learn about: Table of ContentsPART I: DIRECT CURRENT1. A Circuit Sampler2. Charge, Current, Voltage, and Resistance3. Ohm's Law, Power, and Energy4. Simple DC Circuits5. Cells and BatteriesTest: Part IPART II: ALTERNATING CURRENT6. What is Alternating Current7. Electricity in the Home8. Electrical Power Supplies9. Wire and CableTest: Part IIPART III: MAGNETISM10. What is Magnetism11. Electromagnetic Effects12. Practical MagnetismTest: Part IIIFinal ExamAnswers to Quizzes, Tests, and Final ExamAppendix: Schematic SymbolsSuggested Additional ReadingIndex

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis is an entertaining guide to the most common grammatical mistakes in English, from apostrophe atrocities to the lie/lay conundrum. Using examples of errors found in major newspapers, magazines, and TV broadcasting, Thomas Parrish's fictional friend "the Grouchy Grammarian" explains basic elements of grammar and good writing.Trade Review“…this is a lighthearted but highly effective reminder for anyone looking to avoid the pitfalls of the English language…” (Good Book Guide, June 2003)Table of ContentsThe Grouch and I. The Topics. 1. Think! 2. Agreement; or, Where Did the Subject Go? 3. Special Kinds of Subjects. 4. A Bit More about Each. 5. There-the Introducer. 6. Former Greats. 7. Just Because They Sound Alike. 8. The Reason Isn't Because. 9. May and Might: Did They or Didn't They? 10. As of Yet. 11. Floaters and Danglers. 12. A.M./Morning, P.M./Afternoon, Evening. 13. Would Have vs. Had. 14. Apostrophe Atrocities. 15. It's a Contraction-Really. 16. Whom Cares? 17. Whiches, Who's, and That's. 18. Where's the Irony? 19. The Intrusive Of. 20. Preposition Propositions. 21. But Won't You Miss Me? 22. Well, Better, Best, Most. 23. Between Who and What?: Prepositions with More Than One Object. 24. Other . . . or Else. 25. Lie, Lay. 26. A Case of Lead Poisoning. 27. Silly Tautologies. 28. False Series. 29. French Misses. 30. None Is, None Are? 31. Drug Is a Drag. It Must Have Snuck In. 32. And/Or. 33. Overworked and Undereffective. 34. Quantities, Numbers. 35. Watering What You're Writing: The Alleged Criminal and the Alleged Crime. 36. Only But Not Lonely. 37. Pairs-Some Trickier Than Others. 38. Between vs. Among. 39. Those Good Old Sayings. 40. Fuzz. 41. As . . .Than. 42. Not Appropriate. 43. Sorry, You've Already Used That One. 44. From Classical Tongues. 45. Like, Like. 46. Just the Facts, Ma'am. 47. Lost Causes? The Grouch Reflects. Afterword. Using This Book. Thanks. From the Grouch's Shelves-A Bibliography. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn accessible but technically rigorous guide to color management for all users in all market segments Understanding Color Management, 2nd Edition explains the basics of color science as needed to understand color profiling software, color measuring instruments, and software applications, such as Adobe Photoshop and proofing RIPs. It also serves as a practical guide to International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles describing procedures for managing color with digital cameras, LCD displays, inkjet proofers, digital presses and web browsers and tablets. Updates since the first edition include new chapters on iPads, tablets and smartphones; home-cinema projection systems, as well as, with the industrial user in mind, new additional chapters on large-format inkjet for signage and banner printing, flexography, xerography and spot color workflows. Key features: Managing color in digital cameras with Camera Raw and DNG. Step-by-stTable of ContentsForeword to 2nd Edition xv Foreword to 1st Edition xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Why Do We Need Color Management? 1 1.2 Closed-loop Color Control 3 1.3 Need for an Open System 4 1.4 A Color Management System 5 1.5 Color Management Workflows 8 1.6 ICC – International Color Consortium 10 1.7 RGB and CMYK Color Specification 13 1.8 CIE 1931 Yxy and CIE 1976 L∗a∗b∗ 16 1.9 Color Conversions 17 1.10 Three Cs of Color Management 19 1.11 Profile Types 20 1.11.1 Custom Profiles 20 1.11.2 Generic Profiles 21 1.11.3 Standard Profiles 22 1.12 Color Gamuts 24 1.13 Rendering Intents 26 1.14 Color Accuracy 28 1.15 Late-binding Workflows 29 1.16 Spot Colors and Proprietary Systems 30 1.17 Benefits of Color Management 31 1.18 Summary 34 2 Principles of Light and Color 37 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 Light Source – Object – Human Observer 38 2.3 Electromagnetic Radiation 39 2.3.1 The Visible Spectrum 39 2.4 Specifying the Light Source 40 2.4.1 Spectral Power Distribution 40 2.4.2 Color Temperature 42 2.4.3 CIE Illuminants and Standard Sources 43 2.4.4 Viewing Booths 45 2.4.5 “Warm” and “Cold” Colors 46 2.5 Measuring the Sample Spectrum 46 2.5.1 Practical Color Samples 47 2.6 Quantifying Human Color Vision 49 2.6.1 CIE Standard Observer 50 2.6.2 Trichromatic Vision 51 2.7 Changing the Light Source 53 2.7.1 Chromatic Adaptation 53 2.7.2 Yellow Sodium-Vapor Street Lighting 54 2.7.3 Metamerism – Matching Jacket and Trousers 56 2.7.4 PANTONE® D50 Lighting Indicator 58 2.8 Vision and Measurement 58 2.8.1 Viewing the Invisible – Infrared 59 2.8.2 Ultraviolet Fluorescence 60 2.8.3 Color Illusions 60 2.8.4 Color Appearance Modeling 61 2.9 Summary 63 3 Color by Numbers 65 3.1 Introduction 65 3.2 Basic Attributes of Color: Hue, Saturation, and Lightness 66 3.3 Munsell Color System 67 3.4 CIE Color Specification 68 3.5 XYZ Tristimulus Values 69 3.5.1 Calculating XYZ 69 3.5.2 XYZ Example Colors 71 3.5.3 XYZ for Light Sources 72 3.6 CIE 1931 Yxy System 72 3.6.1 Advantages of the Yxy Chromaticity Diagram 74 3.6.2 Disadvantages of the Yxy Chromaticity Diagram 75 3.7 CIE 1976 L∗a∗b∗ System 77 3.7.1 L∗a∗b∗ Practical Examples 80 3.7.2 L∗a∗b∗ vs. Spectral Data 82 3.8 CIE 1976 L∗C∗h 83 3.9 Quantifying Color Difference 84 3.9.1 Calculating ΔE 85 3.9.2 Improved ΔE Equations 88 3.9.3 Which ΔE Should I Use? 91 3.9.4 ΔE and Images 92 3.10 Summary 93 4 Measuring Instruments 95 4.1 Introduction 95 4.2 Instrument Types 96 4.3 Instrument Filter Bands 97 4.4 Densitometers 98 4.4.1 Density Equation 99 4.4.2 Status Densitometry 99 4.4.3 Density and Process Control 100 4.5 Colorimeters 101 4.5.1 Filter-based Colorimetry 101 4.5.2 Improvements in Display Colorimeters 103 4.6 Spectrophotometers 104 4.6.1 Spectrophotometer Features and Functions 106 4.6.2 Ever Popular X-Rite i1Pro2 109 4.6.3 OBA and UV Fluorescence 110 4.6.4 M0, M1, M2, M3 Measurement Modes 111 4.7 Smartphone and Other Low-cost Systems 114 4.8 Inter-instrument and Inter-model Agreement 115 4.9 Instrument Repeatability vs. Accuracy 116 4.10 Instrument Calibration 117 4.11 Summary 120 5 Inside Profiles 121 5.1 Introduction 121 5.2 ICC Profile Specification 122 5.3 Hexadecimal Profile Encoding 123 5.4 Structure of an ICC Profile 124 5.5 Profile Header 124 5.5.1 Preferred CMM 125 5.5.2 Specification Version 125 5.5.3 Profile Class 126 5.5.4 Data Color Space and PCS 127 5.5.5 Flags 128 5.5.6 Rendering Intent 130 5.5.7 PCS Illuminant 130 5.5.8 Profile Creator 130 5.6 Tag Table 131 5.6.1 Profile Description Tag 131 5.6.2 XYZ Primaries Tag 132 5.6.3 Tone Reproduction Curve Tag 133 5.6.4 Media White Point Tag 133 5.6.5 Chromatic Adaptation Tag 133 5.6.6 Lookup Table Tags 135 5.6.7 Target Tag 137 5.6.8 Gamut Tag 139 5.6.9 Optional Tags 139 5.6.10 Private Tags 140 5.7 Version 2 and Version 4 Profiles 140 5.8 Version 5 Profiles and iccMAX 141 5.9 How Does a Lookup Table Work? 142 5.10 Summary 144 6 Managing Color in Digital Cameras 147 6.1 Introduction 147 6.2 Scanner Profiling 148 6.2.1 Making a Scanner Profile 148 6.3 Paradigm Shift from Scanners to Digital Cameras 149 6.4 Color Management for a Digital Camera 152 6.4.1 Bayer Color Filter Array 152 6.4.2 In-Camera JPEG Processing 153 6.4.3 Camera RAW Processing 154 6.4.4 Camera RAW Color Management 155 6.4.5 Creating a Camera RAW Profile 157 6.4.6 Digital Negative – DNG 157 6.5 File Formats for Digital Cameras 159 6.5.1 JPEG Lossy File Format 160 6.5.2 TIFF Lossless File Format 161 6.6 Studio Color Management 161 6.7 Summary 162 7 Monitor Profiles 165 7.1 Introduction 165 7.2 Three Cs of Monitor Profiling 167 7.3 Monitor Profiling Solutions 167 7.3.1 Free Utilities 167 7.3.2 Commercial Profiling Software 168 7.3.3 Integrated Soft Proofing Solutions 169 7.3.4 Hardware Calibrated Monitor Systems 170 7.4 Monitor Basics 171 7.4.1 External Brightness and Contrast 171 7.4.2 RGB Primaries 172 7.4.3 White Point 174 7.4.4 Monitor Gamma 174 7.4.5 Luminance Levels 175 7.4.6 The Dingy Yellow Effect 175 7.5 Making a Monitor Profile 177 7.6 Checking a Monitor Profile 178 7.7 Monitor Profiles and Windows 179 7.8 Monitor Profiles and Web Browsers 180 7.9 Monitor Profiles and Mobile Devices 181 7.10 Soft Proofing in Adobe Acrobat 182 7.11 Standards for Viewing Booths 183 7.12 Summary 184 8 Press and Printer Profiling 187 8.1 Introduction 187 8.2 The Three Cs in Printer Profiling 188 8.3 Calibration in Inkjet Systems 188 8.3.1 Ink Limiting 189 8.3.2 Ink Hooking 190 8.3.3 Ink Splitting 191 8.4 Calibration in Digital Presses 192 8.5 Calibration in Offset Printing 193 8.5.1 G7 Calibration 194 8.5.2 Shared Neutral Appearance vs. Full Color Match 196 8.6 Printer Test Charts 197 8.6.1 Commonly Used Printer Test Charts 197 8.6.2 Visual vs. Random Layout 199 8.7 Printing and Measuring the Test Chart 200 8.7.1 RGB or CMYK or Halftone Printer? 200 8.7.2 Printing with “No Color Management” 202 8.7.3 Layout for Different Measuring Instruments 204 8.7.4 White Backing 205 8.7.5 Examining the Measurement File 205 8.7.6 Averaging Measurement Files 206 8.8 Making a Printer Profile 206 8.8.1 Black Channel Generation 206 8.8.2 Profile Quality 209 8.9 Checking the Printer Profile 210 8.9.1 Quantitative Checking 210 8.9.2 Qualitative Checking 212 8.10 Reference Printing Conditions 213 8.10.1 Developing Reference Printing Conditions 214 8.10.2 American and European Reference Printing Conditions 215 8.10.3 Using Reference Printing Conditions in Prepress and Press 217 8.10.4 “Printing to the Numbers” 219 8.11 Rendering Intents 221 8.11.1 Perceptual Rendering Intent 222 8.11.2 Relative Colorimetric Rendering Intent 223 8.11.3 Absolute Colorimetric Rendering Intent 224 8.11.4 Saturation Rendering Intent 225 8.12 Device LinkWorkflows 225 8.12.1 ICC Device Linking 225 8.12.2 Proprietary Device Linking 226 8.13 Process Control in Printing 227 8.14 Summary 230 9 Spot Colors & Expanded Gamut Printing 233 9.1 Introduction 233 9.2 Specifying a Spot Color – PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM® 236 9.2.1 PANTONE Guides 236 9.2.2 Pantone Digital Color Libraries 239 9.2.3 PANTONE Ink Formulation Recipes 241 9.2.4 Advantages and Disadvantages of the PMS System 242 9.3 Printing a Spot Color 243 9.3.1 Printing with a Spot Color Ink 243 9.3.2 Simulating a Spot Color in CMYK 244 9.4 Spot Colors and Digital Presses 246 9.4.1 Creating a Swatch Book on a Digital Press 247 9.4.2 Spot Color Matching in Digital Presses 247 9.4.3 Spot Color Editor for a Digital Press 249 9.5 Expanded Gamut Printing 249 9.6 Software Solutions for Spot Colors and Expanded Gamut Printing 253 9.6.1 Gamut Warning in Adobe Photoshop 253 9.6.2 Using PANTONE Color Manager 253 9.6.3 Color Conversion with Esko Equinox 254 9.6.4 Gamut Calculation in Esko Color Engine Pilot 255 9.7 Summary 256 10 XML and Color Management 259 10.1 Introduction 259 10.2 Markup Languages 260 10.3 XML Design Principles 261 10.4 Basics of XML 262 10.4.1 Declaration 262 10.4.2 Elements 263 10.4.3 Attributes 263 10.4.4 Schema 264 10.4.5 Private Schemas 265 10.4.6 Validation and Conformance 265 10.5 Working with XML 267 10.5.1 iccMAX 267 10.5.2 Windows Color System (WCS) 268 10.5.3 Color Exchange Format (CxF) 269 10.5.4 X-Rite i1Profiler 271 10.5.5 JDF 272 10.6 XML not-best Practices 272 10.7 Summary 274 11 Color Management in Photoshop 275 11.1 Introduction 275 11.2 Photoshop Through the Ages 276 11.3 Photoshop’s Color Management Rules 278 11.3.1 Rule 1: Image + Profile 279 11.3.2 Rule 2: Profile – Connection Space – Profile 279 11.3.3 Rule 3: Real vs. Simulated Conversions 279 11.4 Photoshop’s Working Space 280 11.5 Menus in Photoshop 281 11.5.1 Opening an Image 282 11.5.2 Image Status 283 11.5.3 Color Settings 284 11.5.4 Assign Profile 286 11.5.5 Convert to Profile 287 11.5.6 Soft Proof Setup 289 11.6 Photoshop and Printing 290 11.6.1 Photoshop’s Print Settings 290 11.6.2 Hard Proofing 292 11.7 Putting It All Together 293 11.8 Summary 295 A Appendix 297 Index 305

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book targets the application of the front-end digital compensation principles to real-life communication systems. For each system, the analog front-end requirements are deduced with and without digital compensation. It focuses on the IEEE 802. 11n WLAN communication system, the Long Term Evolution of the 3GPP cellular system, and the IEEE 802.Table of ContentsPreface. 1. Introduction. 1.1. Wireless transceiver functional description. 1.2. Evolution of the wireless transceiver design. 1.3. Contribution of the book. 1.4. Organization. 2. New Air Interfaces. 2.1. Orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing. 2.2. Single-carrier with frequency domain equalization. 2.3. Multi-input multi-output OFDM. 2.4. Code-division multiple access. 2.5. Frequency-division multiple access. References. 3. Real Lie Front-Ends. 3.1. Front-end architectures. 3.2. Constituent blocks and their non-idealities. 3.3. Individual non-idealities. Referneces. 4. Impact of the Non-Ideal Front Ends on the System Performance. 4.1. OFDM system in the presence of carrier frequency domain and IQ imbalance. 4.2. SC-FDE system in the presence of carrier frequency offset, sample clock offset and IQ imbalance. 4.3. Comparison of the sensitivity of OFDM and SC-FDE to CFO, SCO and IQ imbalance. 4.4. OFDM and SC-FDE systems in he presence of phase noise. 4.5. OFDM system in the presence of clipping, quantization and nonlinearity. 4.6. SC-FDE system in the presence of clipping, quantization an nonlinearity. 4.7. MIMO systems. 4.8. Multi-user systems. References. 5. Generic OFDM System. 5.1. Definition of the generic OFDM system. 5.2. Burst detection. 5.3. AGC setting (amplitude estimation). 5.4. Coarse timing estimation. 5.5 Coarse CFO estimation. 5.6. Fine timing estimation. 5.7. Fine CFO estimation. 5.8. Complexity of auto- and cross-correlation. 5.9. Joint CFO and IQ imbalance acquisition. 5.10. Joint channel and frequency-dependent IQ imbalance estimation. 5.11. Tracking loops for phase noise and residual CFO/SCO. References. 6. Emerging Wireless Communication Systems. 6.1. IEEE 802.11n. 6.2. 3GPP Long-term evolution. Appendices. A. MMSE Linear Detector. B. ML Channel Estimator. C. Matlab Models of Non-Idealities. D. Mathematical Conventions. E. Abbreviations. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides the advanced issues of FPGA design as the underlying theme of the work. In practice, an engineer typically needs to be mentored for several years before these principles are appropriately utilized. The topics that will be discussed in this book are essential to designing FPGA's beyond moderate complexity.Trade Review"Advanced FPGA Design is an excellent and concise reference book that is suitable for engineers already familiar with the fundamentals of FPGA design. (IEEE Signal Processing Magazine, November 2008)Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xv 1. Architecting Speed 1 1.1 High Throughput 2 1.2 Low Latency 4 1.3 Timing 6 1.3.1 Add Register Layers 6 1.3.2 Parallel Structures 8 1.3.3 Flatten Logic Structures 10 1.3.4 Register Balancing 12 1.3.5 Reorder Paths 14 1.4 Summary of Key Points 16 2. Architecting Area 17 2.1 Rolling Up the Pipeline 18 2.2 Control-Based Logic Reuse 20 2.3 Resource Sharing 23 2.4 Impact of Reset on Area 25 2.4.1 Resources Without Reset 25 2.4.2 Resources Without Set 26 2.4.3 Resources Without Asynchronous Reset 27 2.4.4 Resetting RAM 29 2.4.5 Utilizing Set/Reset Flip-Flop Pins 31 2.5 Summary of Key Points 34 3. Architecting Power 37 3.1 Clock Control 38 3.1.1 Clock Skew 39 3.1.2 Managing Skew 40 3.2 Input Control 42 3.3 Reducing the Voltage Supply 44 3.4 Dual-Edge Triggered Flip-Flops 44 3.5 Modifying Terminations 45 3.6 Summary of Key Points 46 4. Example Design: The Advanced Encryption Standard 47 4.1 AES Architectures 47 4.1.1 One Stage for Sub-bytes 51 4.1.2 Zero Stages for Shift Rows 51 4.1.3 Two Pipeline Stages for Mix-Column 52 4.1.4 One Stage for Add Round Key 52 4.1.5 Compact Architecture 53 4.1.6 Partially Pipelined Architecture 57 4.1.7 Fully Pipelined Architecture 60 4.2 Performance Versus Area 66 4.3 Other Optimizations 67 5. High-Level Design 69 5.1 Abstract Design Techniques 69 5.2 Graphical State Machines 70 5.3 DSP Design 75 5.4 Software/Hardware Codesign 80 5.5 Summary of Key Points 81 6. Clock Domains 83 6.1 Crossing Clock Domains 84 6.1.1 Metastability 86 6.1.2 Solution 1: Phase Control 88 6.1.3 Solution 2: Double Flopping 89 6.1.4 Solution 3: FIFO Structure 92 6.1.5 Partitioning Synchronizer Blocks 97 6.2 Gated Clocks in ASIC Prototypes 97 6.2.1 Clocks Module 98 6.2.2 Gating Removal 99 6.3 Summary of Key Points 100 7. Example Design: I2S Versus SPDIF 101 7.1 I2S 101 7.1.1 Protocol 102 7.1.2 Hardware Architecture 102 7.1.3 Analysis 105 7.2 SPDIF 107 7.2.1 Protocol 107 7.2.2 Hardware Architecture 108 7.2.3 Analysis 114 8. Implementing Math Functions 117 8.1 Hardware Division 117 8.1.1 Multiply and Shift 118 8.1.2 Iterative Division 119 8.1.3 The Goldschmidt Method 120 8.2 Taylor and Maclaurin Series Expansion 122 8.3 The CORDIC Algorithm 124 8.4 Summary of Key Points 126 9. Example Design: Floating-Point Unit 127 9.1 Floating-Point Formats 127 9.2 Pipelined Architecture 128 9.2.1 Verilog Implementation 131 9.2.2 Resources and Performance 137 10. Reset Circuits 139 10.1 Asynchronous Versus Synchronous 140 10.1.1 Problems with Fully Asynchronous Resets 140 10.1.2 Fully Synchronized Resets 142 10.1.3 Asynchronous Assertion, Synchronous Deassertion 144 10.2 Mixing Reset Types 145 10.2.1 Nonresetable Flip-Flops 145 10.2.2 Internally Generated Resets 146 10.3 Multiple Clock Domains 148 10.4 Summary of Key Points 149 11. Advanced Simulation 151 11.1 Testbench Architecture 152 11.1.1 Testbench Components 152 11.1.2 Testbench Flow 153 11.1.2.1 Main Thread 153 11.1.2.2 Clocks and Resets 154 11.1.2.3 Test Cases 155 11.2 System Stimulus 157 11.2.1 MATLAB 157 11.2.2 Bus-Functional Models 158 11.3 Code Coverage 159 11.4 Gate-Level Simulations 159 11.5 Toggle Coverage 162 11.6 Run-Time Traps 165 11.6.1 Timescale 165 11.6.2 Glitch Rejection 165 11.6.3 Combinatorial Delay Modeling 166 11.7 Summary of Key Points 169 12. Coding for Synthesis 171 12.1 Decision Trees 172 12.1.1 Priority Versus Parallel 172 12.1.2 Full Conditions 176 12.1.3 Multiple Control Branches 179 12.2 Traps 180 12.2.1 Blocking Versus Nonblocking 180 12.2.2 For-Loops 183 12.2.3 Combinatorial Loops 185 12.2.4 Inferred Latches 187 12.3 Design Organization 188 12.3.1 Partitioning 188 12.3.1.1 Data Path Versus Control 188 12.3.1.2 Clock and Reset Structures 189 12.3.1.3 Multiple Instantiations 190 12.3.2 Parameterization 191 12.3.2.1 Definitions 191 12.3.2.2 Parameters 192 12.3.2.3 Parameters in Verilog-2001 194 12.4 Summary of Key Points 195 13. Example Design: The Secure Hash Algorithm 197 13.1 SHA-1 Architecture 197 13.2 Implementation Results 204 14. Synthesis Optimization 205 14.1 Speed Versus Area 206 14.2 Resource Sharing 208 14.3 Pipelining, Retiming, and Register Balancing 211 14.3.1 The Effect of Reset on Register Balancing 213 14.3.2 Resynchronization Registers 215 14.4 FSM Compilation 216 14.4.1 Removal of Unreachable States 219 14.5 Black Boxes 220 14.6 Physical Synthesis 223 14.6.1 Forward Annotation Versus Back-Annotation 224 14.6.2 Graph-Based Physical Synthesis 225 14.7 Summary of Key Points 226 15. Floorplanning 229 15.1 Design Partitioning 229 15.2 Critical-Path Floorplanning 232 15.3 Floorplanning Dangers 233 15.4 Optimal Floorplanning 234 15.4.1 Data Path 234 15.4.2 High Fan-Out 234 15.4.3 Device Structure 235 15.4.4 Reusability 238 15.5 Reducing Power Dissipation 238 15.6 Summary of Key Points 240 16. Place and Route Optimization 241 16.1 Optimal Constraints 241 16.2 Relationship between Placement and Routing 244 16.3 Logic Replication 246 16.4 Optimization across Hierarchy 247 16.5 I/O Registers 248 16.6 Pack Factor 250 16.7 Mapping Logic into RAM 251 16.8 Register Ordering 251 16.9 Placement Seed 252 16.10 Guided Place and Route 254 16.11 Summary of Key Points 254 17. Example Design: Microprocessor 257 17.1 SRC Architecture 257 17.2 Synthesis Optimizations 259 17.2.1 Speed Versus Area 260 17.2.2 Pipelining 261 17.2.3 Physical Synthesis 262 17.3 Floorplan Optimizations 262 17.3.1 Partitioned Floorplan 263 17.3.2 Critical-Path Floorplan: Abstraction 1 264 17.3.3 Critical-Path Floorplan: Abstraction 2 265 18. Static Timing Analysis 269 18.1 Standard Analysis 269 18.2 Latches 273 18.3 Asynchronous Circuits 276 18.3.1 Combinatorial Feedback 277 18.4 Summary of Key Points 278 19. PCB Issues 279 19.1 Power Supply 279 19.1.1 Supply Requirements 279 19.1.2 Regulation 283 19.2 Decoupling Capacitors 283 19.2.1 Concept 283 19.2.2 Calculating Values 285 19.2.3 Capacitor Placement 286 19.3 Summary of Key Points 288 Appendix A 289 Appendix B 303 Bibliography 319 Index 321

Read more less

Book SynopsisWritten by a leading author on the subject, PID and Predictive Control of Electric Drives and Power Supplies using MATLAB / Simulink provides a timely introduction to current research on PID and predictive control.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Preface xv Acknowledgment xix List of Symbols and Acronyms xxi 1 Modeling of AC Drives and Power Converter 1 1.1 Space Phasor Representation 1 1.1.1 Space Vector for Magnetic Motive Force 1 1.1.2 Space Vector Representation of Voltage Equation 4 1.2 Model of Surface Mounted PMSM 5 1.2.1 Representation in Stationary Reference Frame 5 1.2.2 Representation in Synchronous Reference Frame 7 1.2.3 Electromagnetic Torque 8 1.3 Model of Interior Magnets PMSM 10 1.3.1 Complete Model of PMSM 11 1.4 Per Unit Model and PMSM Parameters 11 1.4.1 Per Unit Model and Physical Parameters 11 1.4.2 Experimental Validation of PMSM Model 12 1.5 Modeling of Induction Motor 13 1.5.1 Space Vector Representation of Voltage Equation of Induction Motor 13 1.5.2 Representation in Stationary Reference Frame 17 1.5.3 Representation in Reference Frame 17 1.5.4 Electromagnetic Torque of Induction Motor 19 1.5.5 Model Parameters of Induction Motor and Model Validation 19 1.6 Modeling of Power Converter 21 1.6.1 Space Vector Representation of Voltage Equation for Power Converter 22 1.6.2 Representation in Reference Frame 22 1.6.3 Representation in Reference Frame 23 1.6.4 Energy Balance Equation 24 1.7 Summary 25 1.8 Further Reading 25 References 25 2 Control of Semiconductor Switches via PWM Technologies 27 2.1 Topology of IGBT Inverter 28 2.2 Six-step Operating Mode 30 2.3 Carrier Based PWM 31 2.3.1 Sinusoidal PWM 31 2.3.2 Carrier Based PWM with Zero-sequence Injection 32 2.4 Space Vector PWM 35 2.5 Simulation Study of the Effect of PWM 37 2.6 Summary 40 2.7 Further Reading 40 References 40 3 PID Control System Design for Electrical Drives and Power Converters 41 3.1 Overview of PID Control Systems Using Pole-assignment Design Techniques 42 3.1.1 PI Controller Design 42 3.1.2 Selecting the Desired Closed-loop Performance 43 3.1.3 Overshoot in Reference Response 45 3.1.4 PID Controller Design 46 3.1.5 Cascade PID Control Systems 48 3.2 Overview of PID Control of PMSM 49 3.2.1 Bridging the Sensor Measurements to Feedback Signals (See the lower part of Figure 3.6) 50 3.2.2 Bridging the Control Signals to the Inputs to the PMSM (See the top part of Figure 3.6) 51 3.3 PI Controller Design for Torque Control of PMSM 52 3.3.1 Set-point Signals to the Current Control Loops 52 3.3.2 Decoupling of the Current Control Systems 53 3.3.3 PI Current Controller Design 54 3.4 Velocity Control of PMSM 55 3.4.1 Inner-loop Proportional Control of q-axis Current 55 3.4.2 Cascade Feedback Control of Velocity:P Plus PI 57 3.4.3 Simulation Example for P Plus PI Control System 59 3.4.4 Cascade Feedback Control of Velocity:PI Plus PI 61 3.4.5 Simulation Example for PI Plus PI Control System 63 3.5 PID Controller Design for Position Control of PMSM 64 3.6 Overview of PID Control of Induction Motor 65 3.6.1 Bridging the Sensor Measurements to Feedback Signals 67 3.6.2 Bridging the Control Signals to the Inputs to the Induction Motor 67 3.7 PID Controller Design for Induction Motor 68 3.7.1 PI Control of Electromagnetic Torque of Induction Motor 68 3.7.2 Cascade Control of Velocity and Position 70 3.7.3 Slip Estimation 73 3.8 Overview of PID Control of Power Converter 74 3.8.1 Bridging Sensor Measurements to Feedback Signals 75 3.8.2 Bridging the Control Signals to the Inputs of the Power Converter 76 3.9 PI Current and Voltage Controller Design for Power Converter 76 3.9.1 P Control of d-axis Current 76 3.9.2 PI Control of q-axis Current 77 3.9.3 PI Cascade Control of Output Voltage 79 3.9.4 Simulation Example 80 3.9.5 Phase Locked Loop 80 3.10 Summary 82 3.11 Further Reading 83 References 83 4 PID Control System Implementation 87 4.1 P and PI Controller Implementation in Current Control Systems 87 4.1.1 Voltage Operational Limits in Current Control Systems 87 4.1.2 Discretization of Current Controllers 90 4.1.3 Anti-windup Mechanisms 92 4.2 Implementation of Current Controllers for PMSM 93 4.3 Implementation of Current Controllers for Induction Motors 95 4.4 Current Controller Implementation for Power Converter 97 4.4.1 Constraints on the Control Variables 97 4.5 Implementation of Outer-loop PI Control System 98 4.5.1 Constraints in the Outer-loop 98 4.5.2 Over Current Protection for AC Machines 99 4.5.3 Implementation of Outer-loop PI Control of Velocity 100 4.5.4 Over Current Protection for Power Converters 100 4.6 MATLAB Tutorial on Implementation of PI Controller 100 4.7 Summary 102 4.8 Further Reading 103 References 103 5 Tuning PID Control Systems with Experimental Validations 105 5.1 Sensitivity Functions in Feedback Control Systems 105 5.1.1 Two-degrees of Freedom Control System Structure 105 5.1.2 Sensitivity Functions 109 5.1.3 Disturbance Rejection and Noise Attenuation 110 5.2 Tuning Current-loop q-axis Proportional Controller (PMSM) 111 5.2.1 Performance Factor and Proportional Gain 112 5.2.2 Complementary Sensitivity Function 112 5.2.3 Sensitivity and Input Sensitivity Functions 114 5.2.4 Effect of PWM Noise on Current Proportional Control System 114 5.2.5 Effect of Current Sensor Noise and Bias 116 5.2.6 Experimental Case Study of Current Sensor Bias Using P Control 118 5.2.7 Experimental Case Study of Current Loop Noise 119 5.3 Tuning Current-loop PI Controller (PMSM) 123 5.4 Performance Robustness in Outer-loop Controllers 128 5.4.1 Sensitivity Functions for Outer-loop Control System 131 5.4.2 Input Sensitivity Functions for the Outer-loop System 135 5.5 Analysis of Time-delay Effects 136 5.5.1 PI Control of q-axis Current 137 5.5.2 P Control of q-axis Current 137 5.6 Tuning Cascade PI Control Systems for Induction Motor 138 5.6.1 Robustness of Cascade PI Control System 140 5.6.2 Robustness Study Using Nyquist Plot 143 5.7 Tuning PI Control Systems for Power Converter 147 5.7.1 Overview of the Designs 147 5.7.2 Tuning the Current Controllers 149 5.7.3 Tuning Voltage Controller 150 5.7.4 Experimental Evaluations 154 5.8 Tuning P Plus PI Controllers for Power Converter 157 5.8.1 Design and Sensitivity Functions 157 5.8.2 Experimental Results 158 5.9 Robustness of Power Converter Control System Using PI Current Controllers 159 5.9.1 Variation of Inductance Using PI Current Controllers 160 5.9.2 Variation of Capacitance on Closed-loop Performance 163 5.10 Summary 167 5.10.1 Current Controllers 167 5.10.2 Velocity, Position and Voltage Controllers 168 5.10.3 Choice between P Current Control and PI Current Control 169 5.11 Further Reading 169 References 169 6 FCS Predictive Control in d − q Reference Frame 171 6.1 States of IGBT Inverter and the Operational Constraints 172 6.2 FCS Predictive Control of PMSM 175 6.3 MATLAB Tutorial on Real-time Implementation of FCS-MPC 177 6.3.1 Simulation Results 179 6.3.2 Experimental Results of FCS Control 181 6.4 Analysis of FCS-MPC System 182 6.4.1 Optimal Control System 182 6.4.2 Feedback Controller Gain 184 6.4.3 Constrained Optimal Control 185 6.5 Overview of FCS-MPC with Integral Action 187 6.6 Derivation of I-FCS Predictive Control Algorithm 191 6.6.1 Optimal Control without Constraints 191 6.6.2 I-FCS Predictive Controller with Constraints 194 6.6.3 Implementation of I-FCS-MPC Algorithm 196 6.7 MATLAB Tutorial on Implementation of I-FCS Predictive Controller 197 6.7.1 Simulation Results 198 6.8 I-FCS Predictive Control of Induction Motor 201 6.8.1 The Control Algorithm for an Induction Motor 202 6.8.2 Simulation Results 204 6.8.3 Experimental Results 205 6.9 I-FCS Predictive Control of Power Converter 209 6.9.1 I-FCS Predictive Control of a Power Converter 209 6.9.2 Simulation Results 211 6.9.3 Experimental Results 214 6.10 Evaluation of Robustness of I-FCS-MPC via Monte-Carlo Simulations 215 6.10.1 Discussion on Mean Square Errors 216 6.11 Velocity and Position Control of PMSM Using I-FCS-MPC 218 6.11.1 Choice of Sampling Rate for the Outer-loop Control System 219 6.11.2 Velocity and Position Controller Design 223 6.12 Velocity and Position Control of Induction Motor Using I-FCS-MPC 224 6.12.1 I-FCS Cascade Velocity Control of Induction Motor 225 6.12.2 I-FCS-MPC Cascade Position Control of Induction Motor 226 6.12.3 Experimental Evaluation of Velocity Control 228 6.13 Summary 232 6.13.1 Selection of sampling interval 233 6.13.2 Selection of the Integral Gain 233 6.14 Further Reading 234 References 234 7 FCS Predictive Control in Reference Frame 237 7.1 FCS Predictive Current Control of PMSM 237 7.1.1 Predictive Control Using One-step-ahead Prediction 238 7.1.2 FCS Current Control in Reference Frame 239 7.1.3 Generating Current Reference Signals in Frame 240 7.2 Resonant FCS Predictive Current Control 241 7.2.1 Control System Configuration 241 7.2.2 Outer-loop Controller Design 242 7.2.3 Resonant FCS Predictive Control System 243 7.3 Resonant FCS Current Control of Induction Motor 247 7.3.1 The Original FCS Current Control of Induction Motor 247 7.3.2 Resonant FCS Predictive Current Control of Induction Motor 250 7.3.3 Experimental Evaluations of Resonant FCS Predictive Control 252 7.4 Resonant FCS Predictive Power Converter Control 255 7.4.1 FCS Predictive Current Control of Power Converter 255 7.4.2 Experimental Results of Resonant FCS Predictive Control 260 7.5 Summary 261 7.6 Further Reading 262 References 262 8 Discrete-time Model Predictive Control (DMPC) of Electrical Drives and Power Converter 265 8.1 Linear Discrete-time Model for PMSM 266 8.1.1 Linear Model for PMSM 266 8.1.2 Discretization of the Continuous-time Model 267 8.2 Discrete-time MPC Design with Constraints 268 8.2.1 Augmented Model 269 8.2.2 Design without Constraints 270 8.2.3 Formulation of the Constraints 272 8.2.4 On-line Solution for Constrained MPC 272 8.3 Experimental Evaluation of DMPC of PMSM 274 8.3.1 The MPC Parameters 274 8.3.2 Constraints 275 8.3.3 Response to Load Disturbances 275 8.3.4 Response to a Staircase Reference 277 8.3.5 Tuning of the MPC controller 278 8.4 Power Converter Control Using DMPC with Experimental Validation 280 8.5 Summary 281 8.6 Further Reading 282 References 283 9 Continuous-time Model Predictive Control (CMPC) of Electrical Drives and PowerConverter 285 9.1 Continuous-time MPC Design 286 9.1.1 Augmented Model 286 9.1.2 Description of the Control Trajectories Using Laguerre Functions 287 9.1.3 Continuous-time Predictive Control without Constraints 289 9.1.4 Tuning of CMPC Control System Using Exponential Data Weighting and Prescribed Degree of Stability 292 9.2 CMPC with Nonlinear Constraints 294 9.2.1 Approximation of Nonlinear Constraint Using Four Linear Constraints 294 9.2.2 Approximation of Nonlinear Constraint Using Sixteen Linear Constraints 294 9.2.3 State Feedback Observer 297 9.3 Simulation and Experimental Evaluation of CMPC of Induction Motor 298 9.3.1 Simulation Results 298 9.3.2 Experimental Results 300 9.4 Continuous-time Model Predictive Control of Power Converter 301 9.4.1 Use of Prescribed Degree of Stability in the Design 302 9.4.2 Experimental Results for Rectification Mode 303 9.4.3 Experimental Results for Regeneration Mode 303 9.4.4 Experimental Results for Disturbance Rejection 304 9.5 Gain Scheduled Predictive Controller 305 9.5.1 The Weighting Parameters 305 9.5.2 Gain Scheduled Predictive Control Law 307 9.6 Experimental Results of Gain Scheduled Predictive Control of Induction Motor 309 9.6.1 The First Set of Experimental Results 309 9.6.2 The Second Set of Experimental Results 311 9.6.3 The Third Set of Experimental Results 312 9.7 Summary 312 9.8 Further Reading 313 References 313 10 MATLAB®/Simulink® Tutorials on Physical Modeling and Test-bed Setup 315 10.1 Building Embedded Functions for Park-Clarke Transformation 315 10.1.1 Park-Clarke Transformation for Current Measurements 316 10.1.2 Inverse Park-Clarke Transformation for Voltage Actuation 317 10.2 Building Simulation Model for PMSM 318 10.3 Building Simulation Model for Induction Motor 320 10.4 Building Simulation Model for Power Converter 325 10.4.1 Embedded MATLAB Function for Phase Locked Loop (PLL) 325 10.4.2 Physical Simulation Model for Grid Connected Voltage Source Converter 328 10.5 PMSM Experimental Setup 332 10.6 Induction Motor Experimental Setup 334 10.6.1 Controller 334 10.6.2 Power Supply 334 10.6.3 Inverter 335 10.6.4 Mechanical Load 335 10.6.5 Induction Motor and Sensors 335 10.7 Grid Connected Power Converter Experimental Setup 335 10.7.1 Controller 335 10.7.2 Inverter 336 10.7.3 Sensors 336 10.8 Summary 337 10.9 Further Reading 337 References 337 Index 339

Read more less

Book SynopsisTreating both integral and differential equation formulations in a unified manner, this book should be a useful reference for graduate use or self-study. Its primary focus is on open-region formulations, and the majority of the material is presented in the context of electromagnetic scattering.Table of ContentsPreface. Acknowledgments. Electromagnetic Theory. Integral Equation Methods for Scattering from Infinite Cylinders. Differential Equation Methods for Scattering from Infinite Cylinders. Algorithms for the Solution of Linear Systems of Equations. The Discretization Process. Basis/Testing Functions and Convergence. Alternative Surface Integral Equation Formulations. Strip Gratings and Other Two-Dimensional Structures with One-Dimensional Periodicity. Three-Dimensional problems with Translational or Rotational Symmetry. Subsectional Basis Functions for MultiDimensional and Vector Problems. Integral Equation Methods for Three-Dimensional Bodies. Frequency-Domain Differential Equation Formulations for Open Three-Dimensional Problems. Finite-Difference Time-Domain Methods on Orthogonal Meshes. Appendix A: Quadrature. Appendix B: Source-Field Relationships for Cylinders Illuminated by an Obliquely Incident Field. Appendix C: Fortran Codes for TM Scattering From Perfect Electric Conducting Cylinders. Appendix D: Additional Software Available Via the Internet. Index. About the Authors.

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to the 3GPP-specified 5G physical layer with a focus on the new beam-based dimension in the radio system 5G New Radio: A Beam-based Air Interface is an authoritative guide to the newly 3GPP-specified 5G physical layer. The contributorsnoted experts on the topic and creators of the actual standardfocus on the beam-based operation which is a new dimension in the radio system due to the millimeter wave deployments of 5G. The book contains information that complements the 3GPP specification and helps to connect the dots regarding key features. The book assumes a basic knowledge of multi-antenna technologies and covers the physical layer aspects related to beam operation, such as initial access, details of reference signal design, beam management, and DL and UL data channel transmission. The contributors also provide a brief overview of standardization efforts, IMT-2020 submission, 5G spectrum, and performance analysis of 5G components.This important tTable of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii Abbreviations xix 1 Introduction and Background 1Mihai Enescu and Karri Ranta-aho 1.1 Why 5G? 1 1.2 Requirements and Targets 2 1.2.1 System Requirements 3 1.2.2 5G Spectrum 7 1.3 Technology Components and Design Considerations 10 1.3.1 Waveform 12 1.3.2 Multiple Access 13 1.3.3 Scalable/Multi Numerology 13 1.3.3.1 Motivation for Multiple Numerologies 13 1.3.3.2 5G NR Numerologies 13 1.3.4 Multi-antenna 17 1.3.5 Interworking with LTE and Other Technologies 18 1.3.6 5G Beam Based Technologies Across Release 15 and Release 16 19 1.3.6.1 Integrated Access and Backhaul 19 1.3.6.2 NR Operation on Unlicensed Frequency Bands (NR-U) 20 1.3.6.3 Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communications 21 1.3.6.4 Vehicular-to-everything (V2X) 21 1.3.6.5 Positioning 22 1.3.6.6 System Enhancements 22 2 Network Architecture and NR Radio Protocols 25Dawid Koziol and Helka-Liina Määttänen 2.1 Architecture Overview 25 2.2 Core Network Architecture 26 2.2.1 Overview 26 2.2.2 Service Request Procedure 29 2.3 Radio Access Network 31 2.3.1 NR Standalone RAN Architecture 31 2.3.2 Additional Architectural Options 32 2.3.3 CU-DU and UP-CP Split 37 2.4 NR Radio Interface Protocols 41 2.4.1 Overall Protocol Structure 41 2.4.2 Main Functions of NR Radio Protocols 44 2.4.3 SDAP Layer 47 2.4.4 PDCP Layer 47 2.4.4.1 PDCP Packet Transmission 48 2.4.4.2 PDCP Duplication 49 2.4.4.3 Access Stratum (AS) Security 50 2.4.4.4 Robust Header Compression (ROHC) 50 2.4.5 RLC 50 2.4.5.1 Segmentation and Concatenation 51 2.4.5.2 RLC Reordering 51 2.4.5.3 ARQ Retransmissions and Status Reporting 52 2.4.6 MAC Protocol 53 2.4.6.1 Overview 53 2.4.6.2 Multiplexing and Demultiplexing 53 2.4.6.3 Logical Channel Prioritization 54 2.4.6.4 Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) 57 2.4.6.5 BWP Operation 58 2.4.6.6 Scheduling Request 60 2.4.6.7 Semi Persistent Scheduling and Configured Grants 60 2.4.6.8 Discontinuous Reception (DRX) 60 2.4.6.9 Buffer Status Reports 62 2.4.6.10 Timing Advance Operation 62 2.4.6.11 MAC Control Elements 63 2.4.7 Radio Resource Control (RRC) 67 2.4.7.1 Overview 67 2.4.7.2 RRC State Machine 68 2.4.7.3 Cells, Cell Groups, and Signaling Radio Bearers 70 2.4.7.4 System Information 71 2.4.7.5 Unified Access Control (UAC) 78 2.4.7.6 Connection Control 79 2.4.7.7 NAS Information Transfer 87 2.4.7.8 UE Assistance Information 87 2.4.7.9 RRC PDU Structure 89 3 PHY Layer 95Mihai Enescu, Youngsoo Yuk, Fred Vook, Karri Ranta-aho, Jorma Kaikkonen, Sami Hakola, Emad Farag, Stephen Grant, and Alexandros Manolakos 3.1 Introduction (Mihai Enescu, Nokia Bell Labs, Finland) 95 3.2 NRWaveforms (Youngsoo Yuk, Nokia Bell Labs, Korea) 96 3.2.1 Advanced CP-OFDM Waveforms for Multi-Service Support 96 3.2.2 Low PAPR Waveform for Coverage Enhancement 102 3.2.3 Considerations on the Waveform for above 52.6 GHz 104 3.3 Antenna Architectures in 5G (Fred Vook, Nokia Bell Labs, USA) 105 3.3.1 Beamforming 105 3.3.2 Antenna Array Architectures 108 3.3.3 Antenna Panels 110 3.3.4 Antenna Virtualization 111 3.3.5 Antenna Ports 113 3.3.6 Beamforming for a Beam-Based Air Interface 115 3.4 Frame Structure and Resource Allocation (Karri Ranta-aho, Nokia Bell Labs, Finland) 115 3.4.1 Resource Grid 115 3.4.2 Data Scheduling and HARQ 118 3.4.3 Frequency Domain Resource Allocation and Bandwidth Part 119 3.4.4 Time Domain Resource Allocation 123 3.5 Synchronization Signals and Broadcast Channels in NR Beam-Based System (Jorma Kaikkonen, Sami Hakola, Nokia Bell Labs, Finland) 125 3.5.1 SS/PBCH Block 125 3.5.2 Synchronization Signal Structure 126 3.5.3 Broadcast Channels 128 3.5.3.1 PBCH 128 3.5.3.2 SIB1 129 3.5.3.3 Delivery of Other Broadcast Information and Support of Beamforming 135 3.6 Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) (Emad Farag, Nokia Bell Labs, USA) 139 3.6.1 Introduction 139 3.6.2 Preamble Sequence 140 3.6.2.1 Useful Properties of Zhadoff-Chu Sequences 140 3.6.2.2 Unrestricted Preamble Sequences 142 3.6.2.3 Restricted Preamble Sequences 144 3.6.3 Preamble Formats 147 3.6.3.1 Long Sequence Preamble Formats 148 3.6.3.2 Short Sequence Preamble Formats 149 3.6.4 PRACH Occasion 150 3.6.5 PRACH Baseband Signal Generation 155 3.7 CSI-RS (Stephen Grant, Ericsson, USA) 159 3.7.1 Overview 159 3.7.1.1 CSI-RS Use Cases 159 3.7.1.2 Key Differences with LTE 161 3.7.2 Physical Layer Design 162 3.7.2.1 Mapping to Physical Resources 162 3.7.2.2 Antenna Port Mapping 167 3.7.2.3 Sequence Generation and Mapping 167 3.7.2.4 Time Domain Behavior 168 3.7.2.5 Multiplexing with Other Signals 169 3.7.3 Zero Power CSI-RS 170 3.7.4 Interference Measurement Resources (CSI-IM) 170 3.7.5 CSI-RS Resource Sets 171 3.7.5.1 CSI-RS for Tracking 171 3.7.5.2 CSI-RS for L1-RSRP Measurement 173 3.8 PDSCH and PUSCH DM-RS, Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. (Alexandros Manolakos, Qualcomm Technologies, Inc, USA) 176 3.8.1 Overview 176 3.8.1.1 What is DM-RS Used for? 176 3.8.1.2 Key Differences from LTE 176 3.8.2 Physical Layer Design 178 3.8.2.1 Mapping to Physical Resources 178 3.8.2.2 Default DM-RS Pattern for PDSCH and PUSCH 189 3.8.2.3 Sequence Generation and Scrambling 193 3.8.3 Procedures and Signaling 200 3.8.3.1 Physical Resource Block Bundling 200 3.8.3.2 DM-RS to PDSCH and PUSCH EPRE Ratio 205 3.8.3.3 Antenna Port DCI Signaling 207 3.8.3.4 Quasi-Colocation Considerations for DM-RS of PDSCH 209 3.9 Phrase- Tracking RS (Youngsoo Yuk, Nokia Bell Labs, Korea) 210 3.9.1 Phase Noise and its Modeling 210 3.9.1.1 Phase Noise in mm-Wave Frequency and its Impact to OFDM System 210 3.9.1.2 Principles of Oscillator Design and Practical Phase Noise Modeling 211 3.9.2 Principle of Phase Noise Compensation 216 3.9.3 NR PT-RS Structure and Procedures 221 3.9.3.1 PT-RS Design for Downlink 221 3.9.3.2 PT-RS Design for Uplink CP-OFDM 224 3.9.3.3 PT-RS Design for Uplink DFT-s-OFDM 225 3.10 SRS (Stephen Grant, Ericsson, USA) 228 3.10.1 Overview 228 3.10.1.1 SRS Use Cases 228 3.10.1.2 Key Differences with LTE 229 3.10.2 Physical Layer Design 230 3.10.2.1 Mapping to Physical Resources 230 3.10.2.2 Antenna Port Mapping 237 3.10.2.3 Sequence Generation and Mapping 239 3.10.2.4 Multiplexing with Other UL Signals 243 3.10.3 SRS Resource Sets 244 3.10.3.1 SRS for Downlink CSI Acquisition for Reciprocity-Based Operation 244 3.10.3.2 SRS for Uplink CSI Acquisition 245 3.10.3.3 SRS for Uplink Beam Management 246 3.11 Power Control (Mihai Enescu, Nokia Bell Labs, Finland) 246 3.12 DL and UL Transmission Framework (Mihai Enescu, Nokia, Karri Ranta-aho, Nokia Bell Labs, Finland) 249 3.12.1 Downlink Transmission Schemes for PDSCH 249 3.12.2 Downlink Transmit Processing 250 3.12.2.1 PHY Processing for PDSCH 250 3.12.2.2 PHY Processing for PDCCH 251 3.12.3 Uplink Transmission Schemes for PUSCH 254 3.12.3.1 Codebook Based UL Transmission 254 3.12.3.2 Non-Codebook Based UL Transmission 255 3.12.4 Uplink Transmit Processings 255 3.12.4.1 PHY Processing for PUSCH 255 3.12.5 Bandwidth Adaptation 256 3.12.5.1 Overview 256 3.12.5.2 Support for Narrow-Band UE in a Wide-Band Cell 257 3.12.5.3 Saving Battery with Bandwidth Adaptation 257 3.12.5.4 Spectrum Flexibility 260 3.12.6 Radio Network Temporary Identifiers (RNTI) 260 4 Main Radio Interface Related System Procedures 261Jorma Kaikkonen, Sami Hakola, Emad Farag, Mihai Enescu, Claes Tidestav, Juha Karjalainen, Timo Koskela, Sebastian Faxér, Dawid Koziol, and Helka-Liina Määttänen 4.1 Initial Access (Jorma Kaikkonen, Sami Hakola, Nokia Bell Labs, Finland, Emad Farag, Nokia Bell Labs, USA) 261 4.1.1 Cell Search 261 4.1.1.1 SS/PBCH Block Time Pattern 262 4.1.1.2 Initial Cell Selection Related Assistance Information 265 4.1.2 Random Access 265 4.1.2.1 Introduction 265 4.1.2.2 Higher Layer Random Access Procedures 266 4.1.2.3 Random Access Use Cases 274 4.1.2.4 Physical Layer Random Access Procedures 274 4.1.2.5 RACH in Release 16 283 4.2 Beam Management (Mihai Enescu, Nokia Bell Labs, Finland, Claes Tidestav, Ericsson, Sweden, Sami Hakola, Juha Karjalainen, Nokia Bell Labs, Finland) 287 4.2.1 Introduction to Beam Management 287 4.2.2 Beam Management Procedures 289 4.2.2.1 Beamwidths 291 4.2.2.2 Beam Determination 291 4.2.3 Beam Indication Framework for DL Quasi Co-location and TCI States 296 4.2.3.1 QCL 296 4.2.3.2 TCI Framework 297 4.2.4 Beam Indication Framework for UL Transmission 303 4.2.4.1 SRS Configurations 305 4.2.4.2 Signaling Options for SRS Used for UL Beam Management 306 4.2.4.3 Beam Reporting from a UE with Multiple Panels 306 4.2.5 Reporting of L1-RSRP 307 4.2.6 Beam Failure Detection and Recovery 312 4.2.6.1 Overview 312 4.2.6.2 Beam Failure Detection 313 4.2.6.3 New Candidate Beam Selection 314 4.2.6.4 Recovery Request and Response 315 4.2.6.5 Completion of BFR Procedure 316 4.3 CSI Framework (Sebastian Faxér, Ericsson, Sweden) 317 4.3.1 Reporting and Resource Settings 318 4.3.2 Reporting Configurations and CSI Reporting Content 323 4.3.2.1 The Different CSI Parameters 323 4.3.2.2 CSI-RS Resource Indicator (CRI) 323 4.3.2.3 SSB Resource Indicator 324 4.3.2.4 Precoder Matrix Indicator (PMI) and Rank Indicator (RI) 324 4.3.2.5 Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) 325 4.3.2.6 Layer Indicator (LI) 327 4.3.2.7 Layer-1 Reference Signal Received Power (L1-RSRP) 327 4.3.2.8 Reporting Quantities 327 4.3.2.9 Frequency-Granularity 331 4.3.2.10 Measurement Restriction of Channel and Interference 332 4.3.2.11 Codebook Configuration 333 4.3.2.12 NZP CSI-RS Based Interference Measurement 333 4.3.3 Triggering/Activation of CSI Reports and CSI-RS 334 4.3.3.1 Aperiodic CSI-RS/IM and CSI Reporting 334 4.3.3.2 Semi-Persistent CSI-RS/IM and CSI Reporting 335 4.3.4 UCI Encoding 337 4.3.4.1 Collision Rules and Priority Order 338 4.3.4.2 Partial CSI Omission for PUSCH-Based CSI 339 4.3.5 CSI Processing Criteria 340 4.3.6 CSI Timeline Requirement 341 4.3.7 Codebook-Based Feedback 344 4.3.7.1 Motivation for the Use of DFT Codebooks 346 4.3.7.2 DL Type I Codebook 349 4.3.7.3 DL Type II Codebook 352 4.4 Radio Link Monitoring (Claes Tidestav, Ericsson, Sweden, Dawid Koziol, Nokia Bell Labs, Poland) 356 4.4.1 Causes of Radio Link Failure 357 4.4.1.1 Physical Layer Problem 357 4.4.1.2 Random Access Failure 363 4.4.1.3 RLC Failure 364 4.4.2 Actions After RLF 365 4.4.2.1 RLF in MCG 365 4.4.2.2 RLF in SCG 368 4.4.3 Relation Between RLM/RLF and BFR 368 4.5 Radio Resource Management (RRM) and Mobility (Helka-Liina Määttänen, Ericsson, Finland, Dawid Koziol, Nokia Bell Labs, Poland, Claes Tidestav, Ericsson, Sweden) 370 4.5.1 Introduction 370 4.5.2 UE Mobility Measurements 371 4.5.2.1 NR Mobility Measurement Quantities 372 4.5.2.2 SS/PBCH Block Measurement Timing Configuration (SMTC) 374 4.5.2.3 SS/PBCH Block Transmission in Frequency Domain 376 4.5.3 Connected Mode Mobility 376 4.5.3.1 Overview of RRM Measurements 378 4.5.3.2 Measurement Configuration 378 4.5.3.3 Performing RRM Measurements 383 4.5.3.4 Handover Procedure 384 4.5.4 Idle and Inactive Mode Mobility 388 4.5.4.1 Introduction 388 4.5.4.2 Cell Selection and Reselection 389 4.5.4.3 Location Registration Udate 393 4.5.4.4 Division of IDLE Mode Tasks between NAS and AS Layers 396 5 Performance Characteristics of 5G New Radio 397Fred Vook 5.1 Introduction 397 5.2 Sub-6 GHz: Codebook-Based MIMO in NR 398 5.2.1 Antenna Array Configurations 398 5.2.2 System Modeling 399 5.2.3 Downlink CSI Feedback and MIMO Transmission Schemes 399 5.2.4 Traffic Models and Massive MIMO 401 5.2.5 Performance in Full Buffer Traffic 401 5.2.6 Performance in Bursty (FTP) Traffic 404 5.2.7 Performance of NR Type II CSI 411 5.3 NR MIMO Performance in mmWave Bands 413 5.4 Concluding Remarks 416 6 UE Features 419Mihai Enescu 6.1 Reference Signals 422 6.1.1 DM-RS 422 6.1.2 CSI-RS 423 6.1.3 PT-RS 424 6.1.4 SRS 424 6.1.5 TRS 425 6.1.6 Beam Management 426 6.1.7 TCI and QCL 428 6.1.8 Beam Failure Detection 428 6.1.9 RLM 429 6.1.10 CSI Framework 429 References 433 Index 437

Read more less

Book SynopsisA revised edition of the text that offers a comparative introduction to global wireless standards, technologies and their applications The revised and updated fourth edition of From GSM to LTE-Advanced Pro and 5G: An Introduction to Mobile Networks and Mobile Broadband offers an authoritative guide to the technical descriptions of the various wireless technologies currently in use. The authora noted expert on the topicexplains the rationale behind their differing mechanisms and implementations while exploring the advantages and limitations of each technology. The fourth edition reflects the significant changes in mobile network technology that have taken place since the third edition was published. The text offers a new chapter on 5G NR that explores its non-standalone and standalone architecture. In the Wi-Fi chapter, additional sections focus on the new WPA3 authentication protocol, the new 802.11ax air interface and protocol extensions like 802.11k and 11v for meshed networks. This important book: Presents the various systems based on the standards, their practical implementation and design assumptions, and their performance and capacityProvides an in-depth analysis of each system in practiceOffers an updated edition of the most current changes to mobile network technologyIncludes questions at the end of each chapter and answers on the accompanying website that make this book ideal for self-study or as course material Written for students and professionals of wireless technologies, the revised fourth edition of From GSM to LTE-Advanced Pro and 5G provides an in-depth review and description of the most current mobile networks and broadband.Table of ContentsPreface to Fourth Edition xv 1 Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) 1 1.1 Circuit-Switched Data Transmission 2 1.1.1 Classic Circuit Switching 2 1.1.2 Virtual Circuit Switching over IP 3 1.2 Standards 4 1.3 Transmission Speeds 5 1.4 The Signaling System Number 7 6 1.4.1 The Classic SS-7 Protocol Stack 7 1.4.2 SS-7 Protocols for GSM 10 1.4.3 IP-Based SS-7 Protocol Stack 11 1.5 The GSM Subsystems 12 1.6 The Network Subsystem 12 1.6.1 The Mobile Switching Center (MSC), Server, and Gateway 13 1.6.2 The Visitor Location Register (VLR) 16 1.6.3 The Home Location Register (HLR) 17 1.6.4 The Authentication Center 21 1.6.5 The Short Messaging Service Center (SMSC) 23 1.7 The Base Station Subsystem (BSS) and Voice Processing 24 1.7.1 Frequency Bands 24 1.7.2 The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) 26 1.7.3 The GSM Air Interface 28 1.7.4 The Base Station Controller (BSC) 35 1.7.5 The TRAU for Voice Encoding 39 1.7.6 Channel Coder and Interleaver in the BTS 43 1.7.7 Ciphering in the BTS and Security Aspects 45 1.7.8 Modulation 48 1.7.9 Voice Activity Detection 48 1.8 Mobility Management and Call Control 50 1.8.1 Cell Reselection and Location Area Update 50 1.8.2 The Mobile-Terminated Call 51 1.8.3 Handover Scenarios 54 1.9 The Mobile Device 56 1.10 The SIM Card 58 1.11 The Intelligent Network Subsystem and CAMEL 63 Questions 65 References 66 2 General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) and EDGE 69 2.1 Circuit-Switched Data Transmission over GSM 69 2.2 Packet-Switched Data Transmission over GPRS 70 2.3 The GPRS Air Interface 72 2.3.1 GPRS vs. GSM Timeslot Usage on the Air Interface 72 2.3.2 Mixed GSM/GPRS Timeslot Usage in a Base Station 74 2.3.3 Coding Schemes 75 2.3.4 Enhanced Datarates for GSM Evolution (EDGE) 76 2.3.5 Mobile Device Classes 79 2.3.6 Network Mode of Operation 80 2.3.7 GPRS Logical Channels on the Air Interface 81 2.4 The GPRS State Model 84 2.5 GPRS Network Elements 87 2.5.1 The Packet Control Unit (PCU) 87 2.5.2 The Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) 88 2.5.3 The Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN) 90 2.6 GPRS Radio Resource Management 91 2.7 GPRS Interfaces 95 2.8 GPRS Mobility Management and Session Management (GMM/SM) 99 2.8.1 Mobility Management Tasks 100 2.8.2 GPRS Session Management 103 Questions 105 References 106 3 Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) and High-Speed Packet Access (HSPA) 107 3.1 Overview 107 3.1.1 3GPP Release 99: The First UMTS Access Network Implementation 108 3.1.2 3GPP Release 4: Enhancements for the Circuit-Switched Core Network 111 3.1.3 3GPP Release 5: High-Speed Downlink Packet Access 111 3.1.4 3GPP Release 6: High-Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) 112 3.1.5 3GPP Release 7: Even Faster HSPA and Continued Packet Connectivity 113 3.1.6 3GPP Release 8: LTE, Further HSPA Enhancements and Femtocells 113 3.2 Important New Concepts of UMTS 114 3.2.1 The Radio Access Bearer (RAB) 114 3.2.2 The Access Stratum and Non-Access Stratum 115 3.2.3 Common Transport Protocols for CS and PS 116 3.3 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 116 3.3.1 Spreading Factor, Chip Rate, and Process Gain 119 3.3.2 The OVSF Code Tree 120 3.3.3 Scrambling in Uplink and Downlink Direction 122 3.3.4 UMTS Frequency and Cell Planning 123 3.3.5 The Near–Far Effect and Cell Breathing 124 3.3.6 Advantages of the UMTS Radio Network Compared to GSM 126 3.4 UMTS Channel Structure on the Air Interface 128 3.4.1 User Plane and Control Plane 128 3.4.2 Common and Dedicated Channels 128 3.4.3 Logical, Transport, and Physical Channels 129 3.4.4 Example: Network Search 133 3.4.5 Example: Initial Network Access Procedure 135 3.4.6 The Uu Protocol Stack 137 3.5 The UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) 142 3.5.1 Node-B, Iub Interface, NBAP, and FP 142 3.5.2 The RNC, Iu, Iub and Iur Interfaces, RANAP, and RNSAP 143 3.5.3 Adaptive Multirate (AMR) NB and WB Codecs for Voice Calls 148 3.5.4 Radio Resource Control (RRC) States 150 3.6 Core Network Mobility Management 155 3.7 Radio Network Mobility Management 156 3.7.1 Mobility Management in the Cell-DCH State 156 3.7.2 Mobility Management in Idle State 165 3.7.3 Mobility Management in Other States 166 3.8 UMTS CS and PS Call Establishment 168 3.9 UMTS Security 172 3.10 High-Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) and HSPA+ 174 3.10.1 HSDPA Channels 174 3.10.2 Shorter Delay Times and Hybrid ARQ (HARQ) 176 3.10.3 Node-B Scheduling 178 3.10.4 Adaptive Modulation and Coding, Transmission Rates, and Multicarrier Operation 179 3.10.5 Establishment and Release of an HSDPA Connection 181 3.10.6 HSDPA Mobility Management 182 3.11 High-Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) 183 3.11.1 E-DCH Channel Structure 184 3.11.2 The E-DCH Protocol Stack and Functionality 187 3.11.3 E-DCH Scheduling 189 3.11.4 E-DCH Mobility 191 3.11.5 E-DCH-Capable Devices 192 3.12 Radio and Core Network Enhancements: CPC 193 3.12.1 A New Uplink Control Channel Slot Format 193 3.12.2 Reporting Reduction 194 3.12.3 HS-SCCH Discontinuous Reception 195 3.12.4 HS-SCCH-less Operation 195 3.12.5 Enhanced Cell-FACH and Cell/URA-PCH States 196 3.13 Radio Resource State Management 197 3.14 Automated Emergency Calls (eCall) from Vehicles 198 Questions 199 References 200 4 Long Term Evolution (LTE) and LTE-Advanced Pro 203 4.1 Introduction and Overview 203 4.2 Network Architecture and Interfaces 206 4.2.1 LTE Mobile Devices and the LTE Uu Interface 207 4.2.2 The eNB and the S1 and X2 Interfaces 210 4.2.3 The Mobility Management Entity (MME) 213 4.2.4 The Serving Gateway (S-GW) 215 4.2.5 The PDN-Gateway 215 4.2.6 The Home Subscriber Server (HSS) 217 4.2.7 Billing, Prepaid, and Quality of Service 218 4.3 FDD Air Interface and Radio Network 219 4.3.1 OFDMA for Downlink Transmission 220 4.3.2 SC-FDMA for Uplink Transmission 222 4.3.3 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation for Subchannels 223 4.3.4 Symbols, Slots, Radio Blocks, and Frames 225 4.3.5 Reference and Synchronization Signals 226 4.3.6 The LTE Channel Model in the Downlink Direction 227 4.3.7 Downlink Management Channels 228 4.3.8 System Information Messages 229 4.3.9 The LTE Channel Model in the Uplink Direction 230 4.3.10 MIMO Transmission 233 4.3.11 HARQ and Other Retransmission Mechanisms 236 4.3.12 PDCP Compression and Ciphering 238 4.3.13 Protocol Layer Overview 239 4.4 TD-LTE Air Interface 240 4.5 Scheduling 242 4.5.1 Downlink Scheduling 242 4.5.2 Uplink Scheduling 246 4.6 Basic Procedures 247 4.6.1 Cell Search 247 4.6.2 Attach and Default Bearer Activation 250 4.6.3 Handover Scenarios 254 4.6.4 Default and Dedicated Bearers 259 4.7 Mobility Management and Power Optimization 260 4.7.1 Mobility Management in RRC Connected State 260 4.7.2 Mobility Management in RRC Idle State 263 4.7.3 Mobility Management and State Changes in Practice 265 4.8 LTE Security Architecture 267 4.9 Interconnection with UMTS and GSM 268 4.9.1 Cell Reselection between LTE and GSM/UMTS 268 4.9.2 RRC Connection Release with Redirect from LTE to GSM/UMTS 270 4.9.3 Handover from LTE to UMTS 271 4.9.4 Returning from UMTS and GPRS to LTE 271 4.10 Carrier Aggregation 272 4.10.1 CA Types, Bandwidth Classes, and Band Combinations 273 4.10.2 CA Configuration, Activation, and Deactivation 275 4.10.3 Uplink Carrier Aggregation 278 4.11 Network Planning Aspects 279 4.11.1 Single Frequency Network 279 4.11.2 Cell-Edge Performance 279 4.11.3 Self-Organizing Network Functionality 281 4.11.4 Cell Site Throughput and Number of Simultaneous Users 282 4.12 CS-Fallback for Voice and SMS Services with LTE 283 4.12.1 SMS over SGs 284 4.12.2 CS-Fallback for Voice Calls 285 4.13 Network Sharing – MOCN and MORAN 288 4.13.1 National Roaming 288 4.13.2 MOCN (Multi-Operator Core Network) 289 4.13.3 MORAN (Mobile Operator Radio Access Network) 290 4.14 From Dipoles to Active Antennas and Gigabit Backhaul 290 4.15 IPv6 in Mobile Networks 292 4.15.1 IPv6 Prefix and Interface Identifiers 293 4.15.2 IPv6 and International Roaming 295 4.15.3 IPv6 and Tethering 296 4.15.4 IPv6-Only Connectivity 297 4.16 Network Function Virtualization 298 4.16.1 Virtualization on the Desktop 299 4.16.2 Running an Operating System in a Virtual Machine 299 4.16.3 Running Several Virtual Machines Simultaneously 300 4.16.4 Virtual Machine Snapshots 300 4.16.5 Cloning a Virtual Machine 301 4.16.6 Virtualization in Data Centers in the Cloud 302 4.16.7 Managing Virtual Machines in the Cloud 303 4.16.8 Network Function Virtualization 303 4.16.9 Virtualizing Routers 305 4.16.10 Software-Defined Networking 305 4.17 Machine Type Communication and the Internet of Things 306 4.17.1 LTE Cat-1 Devices 307 4.17.2 LTE Cat-0 Devices and PSM 307 4.17.3 LTE Cat-M1 Devices 308 4.17.4 LTE NB1 (NB-IoT) Devices 308 4.17.5 NB-IoT – Deployment Options 309 4.17.6 NB-IoT – Air Interface 309 4.17.7 NB-IoT – Control Channels and Scheduling 310 4.17.8 NB-IoT Multicarrier Operation 311 4.17.9 NB-IoT Throughput and Number of Devices per Cell 312 4.17.10 NB-IoT Power Consumption Considerations 312 4.17.11 NB-IoT – High Latency Communication 313 4.17.12 NB-IoT – Optimizing IP-Based and Non-IP-Based Data Transmission 314 4.17.13 NB-IoT Summary 316 Questions 316 References 317 5 VoLTE, VoWifi, and Mission Critical Communication 321 5.1 Overview 321 5.2 The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) 322 5.3 The IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) and VoLTE 326 5.3.1 Architecture Overview 326 5.3.2 Registration 328 5.3.3 VoLTE Call Establishment 330 5.3.4 LTE Bearer Configurations for VoLTE 332 5.3.5 Dedicated Bearer Setup with Preconditions 334 5.3.6 Header Compression and DRX 336 5.3.7 Speech Codec and Bandwidth Negotiation 337 5.3.8 Alerting Tone, Ringback Tone, and Early Media 340 5.3.9 Port Usage 340 5.3.10 Message Filtering and Asserted Identities 341 5.3.11 DTMF Tones 342 5.3.12 SMS over IMS 343 5.3.13 Call Forwarding Settings and XCAP 344 5.3.14 Single Radio Voice Call Continuity 346 5.3.15 Radio Domain Selection, T-ADS, and VoLTE Interworking with GSM and UMTS 349 5.3.16 VoLTE Emergency Calls 350 5.4 VoLTE Roaming 352 5.4.1 Option 1: VoLTE Local Breakout 353 5.4.2 Option 2: VoLTE S8-Home Routing 354 5.5 Voice over WiFi (VoWifi) 356 5.5.1 VoWifi Network Architecture 356 5.5.2 VoWifi Handover 359 5.5.3 Wi-Fi-Preferred vs. Cellular-Preferred 360 5.5.4 SMS, MMS, and Supplementary Services over Wi-Fi 360 5.5.5 VoWifi Roaming 361 5.6 VoLTE Compared to Fixed-Line IMS in Practice 362 5.7 Mission Critical Communication (MCC) 363 5.7.1 Overview 363 5.7.2 Advantages of LTE for Mission Critical Communication 364 5.7.3 Challenges of Mission Critical Communication for LTE 365 5.7.4 Network Operation Models 367 5.7.5 Mission Critical Push To Talk (MCPTT) – Overview 368 5.7.6 MCPTT Group Call Establishment 370 5.7.7 MCPTT Floor Control 371 5.7.8 MCPTT Group Call Types 372 5.7.9 MCPTT Configuration and Provisioning 372 5.7.10 eMBMS for MCPTT 373 5.7.11 Priority and Quality of Service 376 Questions 376 References 377 6 5G New Radio (NR) and the 5G Core 379 6.1 Introduction and Overview 379 6.1.1 Reasons for Initially Launching 5G as a Hybrid Solution 380 6.1.2 Frequency Range 1 and 2 381 6.1.3 Dynamic Spectrum Sharing in Low- and Mid-Bands 381 6.1.4 Network Deployments and Organization of this Chapter 382 6.2 5G NR Non-Standalone (NSA) Architecture 382 6.2.1 Network Architecture and Interfaces 382 6.2.2 3GPP 5G Deployment Options 1–7 and Dynamic Spectrum Sharing 385 6.2.3 Options 3, 3A, and Option 3X 387 6.2.4 Fronthaul Interface 388 6.3 5G TDD Air Interface 388 6.3.1 Flexible OFDMA for Downlink Transmission 390 6.3.2 The 5G Resource Grid: Symbols, Slots, Resource Blocks, and Frames 392 6.3.3 Synchronization and Reference Signals 393 6.3.4 Massive-MIMO for Beamforming and Multi-User Data Transfer 395 6.3.5 TDD Slot Formats 398 6.3.6 Downlink Control Channels 400 6.3.7 Uplink Channels 401 6.3.8 Bandwidth Parts 401 6.3.9 The Downlink Control Channel and Scheduling 403 6.3.10 Downlink Data Throughput in Theory and Practice 405 6.3.11 Uplink Data Throughput 407 6.3.12 TDD Air Interface for mmWave Bands (FR2) 407 6.4 5G FDD Air Interface 409 6.4.1 Refarming and Dynamic Spectrum Sharing 410 6.5 EN-DC Bearers and Scheduling 415 6.5.1 Split Bearers, Flow Control 416 6.5.2 Two UE Transmitter Requirement for EN-DC 417 6.6 Basic Procedures and Mobility Management in Non-Standalone Mode 418 6.6.1 Establishment of an LTE-Only Bearer as 5G Anchor 419 6.6.2 5G NR Cell Addition in Non-Standalone Mode 422 6.6.3 When to Show a 5G Indicator 426 6.6.4 Handover Scenarios 427 6.6.5 EN-DC Signaling Radio Bearers 430 6.6.6 5G Non-Standalone and VoLTE 430 6.7 Network Planning and Deployment Aspects 431 6.7.1 The Range of Band n78 431 6.7.2 Backhaul Considerations 432 6.8 5G NR Standalone (SA) Architecture and Basic Procedures 432 6.8.1 5G Core Network Functions 432 6.8.2 Network Interfaces 434 6.8.3 Subscriber and Device Identifiers 435 6.8.4 5G Core Network Procedures Overview 435 6.8.5 Connection Management 436 6.8.6 Registration Management Procedure 436 6.8.7 Session Management 437 6.8.8 Mobility Management 442 6.8.9 New Security Features 444 6.8.10 The 5G Core and Different RAN Deployments 446 6.8.11 5G and 4G Core Network Interworking 446 6.8.12 The 5G Core Network and SMS 451 6.8.13 Cloud Native 5G Core 451 6.9 The 5G Air Interface in Standalone Operation 454 6.9.1 RRC Inactive State 454 6.9.2 System Information Messages 455 6.9.3 Measurement Configuration, Events, and Handovers 456 6.10 Future 5G Functionalities 457 6.10.1 Voice Service in 5G 457 6.10.2 Ethernet and Unstructured PDU Session Types 459 6.10.3 Network Slicing 459 Questions 461 References 461 7 Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) 465 7.1 Wireless LAN Overview 465 7.2 Transmission Speeds and Standards 465 7.3 WLAN Configurations: From Ad Hoc to Wireless Bridging 468 7.3.1 Ad Hoc, BSS, ESS, and Wireless Bridging 469 7.3.2 SSID and Frequency Selection 472 7.4 Management Operations 474 7.5 The MAC Layer 479 7.5.1 Air Interface Access Control 479 7.5.2 The MAC Header 482 7.6 The Physical Layer and MAC Extensions 483 7.6.1 IEEE 802.11b – 11 Mbit/s 484 7.6.2 IEEE 802.11g with up to 54 Mbit/s 486 7.6.3 IEEE 802.11a with up to 54 Mbit/s 488 7.6.4 IEEE 802.11n with up to 600 Mbits/s 489 7.6.5 IEEE 802.11ac – Wi-Fi 5 – Gigabit Wireless 497 7.6.6 IEEE 802.11ax – Wi-Fi 6 – High Efficiency Extensions 502 7.6.7 IEEE 802.11ad – Gigabit Wireless at 60 GHz 506 7.7 Wireless LAN Security 510 7.7.1 Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) and Early Security Measures 510 7.7.2 WPA and WPA2 Personal Mode Authentication 510 7.7.3 WPA and WPA2 Enterprise Mode Authentication – EAP-TLS 512 7.7.4 WPA and WPA2 Enterprise Mode Authentication – EAP-TTLS 513 7.7.5 WPA and WPA2 Enterprise Mode Authentication – EAP-PEAP 515 7.7.6 WPA and WPA2 Enterprise Mode Authentication – EAP-SIM 516 7.7.7 WPA and WPA2 Encryption 518 7.7.8 Wi-Fi-Protected Setup (WPS) 519 7.7.9 WPA3 Personal Mode Authentication 520 7.7.10 Protected Management Frames 522 7.8 IEEE 802.11e and WMM – Quality of Service 523 Questions 530 References 531 8 Bluetooth and Bluetooth Low Energy 533 8.1 Overview and Applications 533 8.2 Physical Properties 534 8.3 Piconets and the Master/Slave Concept 538 8.4 The Bluetooth Protocol Stack 540 8.4.1 The Baseband Layer 540 8.4.2 The Link Controller 546 8.4.3 The Link Manager 549 8.4.4 The HCI Interface 549 8.4.5 The L2CAP Layer 552 8.4.6 The Service Discovery Protocol 554 8.4.7 The RFCOMM Layer 556 8.4.8 Overview of Bluetooth Connection Establishment 557 8.5 Bluetooth Security 558 8.5.1 Pairing up to Bluetooth 2.0 559 8.5.2 Pairing with Bluetooth 2.1 and Above (Secure Simple Pairing) 560 8.5.3 Authentication 562 8.5.4 Encryption 563 8.5.5 Authorization 563 8.5.6 Security Modes 564 8.6 Bluetooth Profiles 565 8.6.1 Basic Profiles: GAP, SDP, and the Serial Profile 567 8.6.2 Object Exchange Profiles: FTP, Object Push, and Synchronize 568 8.6.3 Headset, Hands-Free, and SIM Access Profile 570 8.6.4 High-Quality Audio Streaming 574 8.6.5 The Human Interface Device (HID) Profile 577 8.7 Bluetooth Low Energy 577 8.7.1 Introduction 577 8.7.2 The Lower BLE Layers 579 8.7.3 BLE SMP, GAP, and Connection Establishment 581 8.7.4 BLE Authentication, Security, and Privacy 582 8.7.5 BLE ATT and GATT 583 8.7.6 Practical Example 585 8.7.7 BLE Beacons 587 8.7.8 BLE and IPv6 Internet Connectivity 588 Questions 589 References 590 Index 593

Read more less

Book SynopsisPROJECT MANAGEMENT NEXT GENERATION Strategic guidance on enabling transformational change in the project management landscape In Project Management Next Generation: The Pillars for Organizational Excellence, a team of world-renowned project management leaders delivers an expert discussion on project management implementation in organizations of all kinds. The book explores 10 pillars of project management that will be critical for companies in the coming decade. It offers contributions from industry changemakers and thought leaders that provide the perfect balance between practical experience across a variety of programs, projects, and transformation initiatives. It's a must-have title for practicing project managers who seek hands-on guidance and insightful case studies complete with discussion questions and instruction materials, including PowerPoint lecture slides and a full Instructors Manual on the companion website. In addition to the perspectives of several global commercial oTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Pillar #1: Strategic Delivery Capability 1 1.0 Setting the Stage 1 1.1 Background 6 1.2 Line-of-Sight 8 1.3 Sustainable Competitive Advantage 8 1.4 High-Performance Teams 9 1.5 High-Performance Organizations 9 1.6 Strategic Competency 11 1.7 Background to Barriers 12 1.8 Excellence in Action: Medtronic 24 1.9 Strategically Improving 26 1.10 Innovation in Action: Repsol 27 1.11 Strategic Agility 34 1.12 Excellence in Action: Merck Kgaa 35 1.13 Excellence in Action: Cisco 38 1.14 Excellence in Action: Servicenow 47 1.15 Excellence in Action: Farm Credit Mid-America 49 1.16 Excellence in Action: Project Management United 64 1.17 Letter to Future Project Manager 71 References 73 2 Pillar 2: Applying Project Management in Humanitarian and Social Initiatives 77 2.0 What Makes Humanitarian Projects Different? 77 2.1 The Impact of Project Management Practices in Humanitarian Projects 77 2.2 Excellence IN Action: Ambev: A Humanitarian Approach to Addressing Challenges During the Covid-19 Pandemia 78 2.3 Excellence in Action: Albert Einstein Hospital: Application of Project Management to Address the Covid-19 Health Crisis and Lessons Learned 89 2.4 Excellence in Action: United Nations: Program Management for Humanitarian and Development Projects 103 2.5 16/6 Project in Haiti 118 2.6 Conclusions 122 References 123 3 Pillar #3: Project Management Is Creating Innovative Cultures 125 3.0 Background 125 3.1 Introducing the Innovative Culture Model 125 3.2 Balanced Alignment and Autonomy 127 3.3 Excellence in Action: Sunrise UPC 127 3.4 Innovation Competencies 130 3.5 Excellence in Action: Bosch 130 3.6 Blocking Off Time to Think 147 3.7 Excellence in Action: 3M 148 3.8 Refreshed Executive Role 149 3.9 Excellence in Action: General Motors 150 3.10 The Innovation Culture 152 3.11 Excellence in Action: Apple 152 3.12 Projects as Innovation Labs 154 3.13 Excellence in Action: Samsung 154 3.14 New Ways of Working 155 3.15 Excellence in Action: Siemens 156 3.16 Readying and Sustaining Tomorrow’s Excellence Cultures 159 3.17 A Future (Working) Day in the Life of the Program Manager 160 3.18 Excellence in Action: Solvo360 163 3.19 Excellence in Action: Texas Instruments 169 4 Pillar #4: Digitalization Is Central to Delivering Projects’ Promises 173 4.0. Background 173 4.1 Excellence in Action: ASGC 174 4.2 Digitalization and Projects Framework 180 4.3 Experimenting Capacity 182 4.4 Excellence in Action: ServiceNow 182 4.5 Context-Driven Planning 185 4.6 Excellence in Action: Progressive Insurance 186 4.7 Co-Creation 190 4.8 Growth in Information Warehouses 190 4.9 Knowledge Repositories 191 4.10 The Need for Business Intelligence Systems 194 4.11 Big Data 194 4.12 Top Seven Things to Consider When Choosing a BI Tool 196 4.13 Stop Treating Business Intelligence Projects as IT Projects 198 4.14 Dashboards vs. Reports: Which One Should You Go With? 200 4.15 Mapping Dashboards to Objectives 202 4.16 Virtual Teams Engagement 203 4.17 Excellence in Action: IBM 204 4.18 Outcomes-Focused Work 218 4.19 Excellence in Action: Dubai Customs 219 4.20 Ever-Changing Ways of Working 221 4.21 Excellence in Action: Wuttke & Team 221 4.22 Digitalization and Projects Path Forward 226 5 Pillar 5: Evolving Project Delivery Skills 227 5.0 The Changing Landscape 227 5.1 Problem Solving and Decision-Making 228 5.2 Brainstorming 251 5.3 Design Thinking 257 5.4 Excellence in Action: Disney 260 References 268 6 Pillar 6: New Forms of Project Leadership 271 6.0 Introduction 271 6.1 Issues with Leadership Studies 271 6.2 Selecting the Leader 272 6.3 Introduction to Leadership Styles 272 6.4 Project Management Challenges 275 6.5 Leadership and Cultures 276 6.6 Excellence in Action: Project Leadership for the Smart Mission 277 6.7 Leadership and Stakeholder Relations Management 279 6.8 The Changing Leadership Landscape 290 6.9 Servant Leadership 292 6.10 Social Project Management Leadership 294 6.11 The Growth in Importance of Crisis Leadership 295 6.12 The Growth in Competency Models 301 6.13 Project Management Core Competency Models 303 6.14 Excellence in Action: Eli Lilly 304 6.15 Conclusions 313 References 313 7 Pillar 7: Organizational Cultural Shift to the Project Way of Working 315 7.0 Introduction 315 7.1 The Need for Cultural Shift 315 7.2 Excellence in Action: GEA Project Management in GEA Process Engineering: Our Vision for the Future 318 7.3 Excellence in Action: Norte Energia Belo Monte Hydroelectric Power Plant 324 7.4 Conclusions 349 References 349 8 Pillar 8: Adaptive Frameworks and Life Cycles 351 8.0 Background 351 8.1 The Risks of Using a Singular Methodology 352 8.2 Project Management Landscape Changes 353 8.3 The Need for Multiple Flexible Methodologies 353 8.4 Selecting the Right Framework 356 8.5 Be Careful What You Wish For 357 8.6 Strategic Selection Implications 358 8.7 Excellence in Action: ServiceNow 359 8.8 Excellence in Action: The International Institute for Learning 361 8.9 The Fuzzy Front End 367 8.10 Line-of-Sight 370 8.11 Establishing Gates 370 8.12 The Future Fuzzy Front Gates 371 8.13 Excellence in Action: IdeaScale 372 8.14 Project Selection Criteria 375 8.15 Excellence in Action: AstraZeneca 377 8.16 Excellence in Action: Airbus 391 8.17 Partnership Fuzzy Front Ends 393 8.18 Excellence in Action: Facebook 394 8.19 Life-Cycle Phases 395 8.20 Project Closure 399 8.21 Excellence in Action: Motorola 400 8.22 New Causes of Complete or Partial Failure 401 8.23 Conclusion 401 References 402 9 Pillar 9: Evolving Nature of PMOs and Governance 403 9.0 Introduction 403 9.1 How Governance Can Be Applied in an Agile and Volatile World 403 9.2 Excellence in Action: SITA – Airport Systems Integration Projects Cry for Flexible Governance 404 9.3 Excellence in Action: ServiceNow – From Project Management to Strategy Realization 406 9.4 Excellence in Action: PMO Global Alliance – PMOs in Transformation 410 9.5 Excellence in Action: Determining the Mathematical ROI of a PMO Implementation 423 9.6 Conclusions 436 References 436 10 Pillar #10: Significant Growth in Value-Driven and Business-Related Metrics 439 10.0 The Growth of Project Metrics 439 10.1 The Growth of Metric Measurement Techniques 440 10.2 Selecting the Right Metrics 442 10.3 Benefits Realization and Value Management 443 10.4 Measuring Benefits and Value 447 10.5 Excellence in Action: Philips Business Group Hospital Patient Monitoring 449 10.6 Metrics for Measuring Intangibles 466 10.7 The Need for Strategic Metrics 468 10.8 Project Health Checks 471 10.9 Action Items 475 10.10 Failure of Traditional Metrics and KPIs 476 10.11 Establishing a Metrics Management Program 477 10.12 Conclusion 478 About the Authors 479 Index 481

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents an Cyber-Assurance approach to the Internet of Things (IoT) This book discusses the cyber-assurance needs of the IoT environment, highlighting key information assurance (IA) IoT issues and identifying the associated security implications. Through contributions from cyber-assurance, IA, information security and IoT industry practitioners and experts, the text covers fundamental and advanced concepts necessary to grasp current IA issues, challenges, and solutions for the IoT. The future trends in IoT infrastructures, architectures and applications are also examined. Other topics discussed include the IA protection of IoT systems and information being stored, processed or transmitted from unauthorized access or modification of machine-2-machine (M2M) devices, radio-frequency identification (RFID) networks, wireless sensor networks, smart grids, and supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) systems. The book also discusses IA measures necessary to detect, pTable of ContentsList of Figures xiii List of Tables xvii Foreword xix Preface xxix Acknowledgments xxxiii Contributors xxxv Acronyms xli Introduction xlvii Part I Embedded Design Security 1 1 Certified Security by Design for the Internet of Things 3 Shiu-Kai Chin 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Lessons from the Microelectronics Revolution 3 1.3 Certified Security by Design 5 1.4 Chapter Outline 9 1.5 An Access-Control Logic 9 1.6 An Introduction to HOL 17 1.7 The Access-Control Logic in HOL 25 1.8 Cryptographic Components and Their Models in Higher-Order Logic 30 1.9 Cryptographic Hash Functions 33 1.10 Asymmetric-Key Cryptography 33 1.11 Digital Signatures 36 1.12 Adding Security to State Machines 38 1.13 A Networked Thermostat Certified Secure by Design 49 1.14 Thermostat Use Cases 52 1.15 Security Contexts for the Server and Thermostat 56 1.16 Top-Level Thermostat Secure-State Machine 58 1.17 Refined Thermostat Secure-State Machine 67 1.18 Equivalence of Top-Level and Refined Secure-State Machines 81 1.19 Conclusions 84 Appendix 86 References 99 2 Cyber-assurance Through Embedded Security for The Internet of Things 101 Tyson T. Brooks and Joon Park 2.1 Introduction 101 2.2 Cyber-Security and Cyber-Assurance 106 2.3 Recognition, Fortification, Re-Establishment, Survivability 108 2.4 Conclusion 120 References 122 3 A Secure Update Mechanism for Internet of Things Devices 129 Martin Goldberg 3.1 Introduction 129 3.2 Importance of IOT Security 130 3.3 Applying the Defense In-Depth Strategy for Updating 131 3.4 A Standards Approach 132 3.5 Conclusion 134 References 135 Part II Trust Impact 137 4 Security and Trust Management for the Internet of Things: An Rfid and Sensor Network Perspective 139 M. Bala Krishna 4.1 Introduction 139 4.2 Security and Trust in the Internet of Things 142 4.3 Radio Frequency Identification: Evolution and Approaches 147 4.4 Security and Trust in Wireless Sensor Networks 151 4.5 Applications of Internet of Things and RFID in Real-Time Environment 156 4.6 Future Research Directions and Conclusion 158 References 159 5 THE IMPACT OF IoT DEVICES ON NETWORK TRUST Boundaries 163 Nicole Newmeyer 5.1 Introduction 163 5.2 Trust Boundaries 164 5.3 Risk Decisions and Conclusion 173 References 174 Part III Wearable Automation Provenance 175 6 WEARABLE IoT COMPUTING: INTERFACE, EMOTIONS, Wearer’s Culture, and Security/privacy Concerns 177 Robert McCloud, Martha Lerski, Joon Park, and Tyson T. Brooks 6.1 Introduction 177 6.2 Data Accuracy in Wearable Computing 178 6.3 Interface and Culture 178 6.4 Emotion and Privacy 179 6.5 Privacy Protection Policies for Wearable Devices 181 6.6 Privacy/Security Concerns About Wearable Devices 182 6.7 Expectations About Future Wearable Devices 183 References 184 7 ON VULNERABILITIES OF IoT-BASED Consumer-oriented Closed-loop Control Automation Systems 187 Martin Murillo 7.1 Introduction 187 7.2 Industrial Control Systems and Home Automation Control 189 7.3 Vulnerability Identification 193 7.4 Modeling and Simulation of Basic Attacks to Control Loops and Service Providers 198 7.5 Illustrating Various Attacks Through a Basic Home Heating System Model 200 7.6 A Glimpse of Possible Economic Consequences of Addressed Attacks 203 7.7 Discussion and Conclusion 205 References 206 8 Big Data Complex Event Processing for Internet Of Things Provenance: Benefits for Audit, Forensics, and Safety 209 Mark Underwood 8.1 Overview of Complex Event Processing 209 8.2 The Need: IoT Security Challenges in Audit, Forensics, and Safety 211 8.3 Challenges to CEP Adoption in IoT Settings 213 8.4 CEP and IoT Security Visualization 215 8.5 Summary 217 8.6 Conclusion 219 References 220 Part IV Cloud Artificial Intelligence Cyber-physical Systems 225 9 a Steady-state Framework for Assessing Security Mechanisms in a Cloud-of-things Architecture 227 Tyson T. Brooks and Lee McKnight Variable Nomenclature 227 9.1 Introduction 228 9.2 Background 229 9.3 Establishing a Framework for CoT Analysis 232 9.4 The CoT Steady-State Framework 238 9.5 Conclusion 244 References 245 10 An Artificial Intelligence Perspective on Ensuring Cyber-assurance for the Internet Of Things 249 Utku Köse 10.1 Introduction 249 10.2 AI-Related Cyber-Assurance Research for the IoT 250 10.3 Multidisciplinary Intelligence Enabling Opportunities with Ai 252 10.4 Future Research on AI-Based Cyber-Assurance for IoT 254 10.5 Conclusion 255 References 255 11 Perceived Threat Modeling for Cyber-physical Systems 257 Christopher Leberknight 11.1 Introduction 257 11.2 Overview of Physical Security 259 11.3 Relevance to Grounded Theory 261 11.4 Theoretical Model Construction 262 11.5 Experiment 263 11.6 Results 267 11.7 Discussion 275 11.8 Future Research 276 11.9 Conclusion 278 References 279 Appendices A List of Ieee Internet of Things Standards 283 B Glossary 319 C Csbd Thermostat Report 333 D Csbd Access-control Logic Report 415 Bibliography 433 Index 457

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents wideband RF technologies and antennas in the microwave band and millimeter-wave band This book provides an up-to-date introduction to the technologies, design, and test procedures of RF components and systems at microwave frequencies. The book begins with a review of the elementary electromagnetics and antenna topics needed for students and engineers with no basic background in electromagnetic and antenna theory. These introductory chapters will allow readers to study and understand the basic design principles and features of RF and communication systems for communications and medical applications. After this introduction, the author examines MIC, MMIC, MEMS, and LTCC technologies. The text will also present information on meta-materials, design of microwave and mm wave systems, along with a look at microwave and mm wave receivers, transmitters and antennas. Discusses printed antennas for wireless communication systems and wearable antennas for coTable of ContentsAcknowledgments xiii Author Biography xv Preface xxv 1 Electromagnetic Wave Propagation and Applications 1 1.1 Electromagnetic Spectrum 1 1.2 Free-Space Propagation 4 1.3 Friis Transmission Formula 6 1.4 Link Budget Examples 8 1.5 Noise 9 1.6 Communication System Link Budget 11 1.7 Path Loss 13 1.8 Receiver Sensitivity 13 1.9 Receivers: Definitions and Features 14 1.10 Types of Radars 16 1.11 Transmitters: Definitions and Features 16 References 18 2 Electromagnetic Theory and Transmission Lines for RF Designers 19 2.1 Definitions 19 2.2 Electromagnetic Waves 20 2.3 Transmission Lines 25 2.4 Matching Techniques 29 2.5 Coaxial Transmission Line 34 2.6 Microstrip Line 36 2.7 Materials 39 2.8 Waveguides 43 2.9 Circular Waveguide 48 References 54 3 Basic Antennas for Communication Systems 57 3.1 Introduction to Antennas 57 3.2 Antenna Parameters 58 3.3 Dipole Antenna 60 3.4 Basic Aperture Antennas 66 3.5 Horn Antennas 69 3.6 Antenna Arrays for Communication Systems 80 References 88 4 MIC and MMIC Microwave and Millimeter Wave Technologies 91 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Microwave Integrated Circuits Modules 92 4.3 Development and Fabrication of a Compact Integrated RF Head for Inmarsat-M Ground Terminal 92 4.4 Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuits 100 4.5 Conclusions 111 References 111 5 Printed Antennas for Wireless Communication Systems 113 5.1 Printed Antennas 113 5.2 Two Layers Stacked Microstrip Antennas 119 5.3 Stacked Monopulse Ku Band Patch Antenna 122 5.4 Loop Antennas 123 5.5 Wired Loop Antenna 132 5.6 Radiation Pattern of a Loop Antenna Near a Metal Sheet 133 5.7 Planar Inverted-F Antenna 136 References 140 6 MIC and MMIC Millimeter-Wave Receiving Channel Modules 141 6.1 18–40 GHz Compact RF Modules 141 6.2 18–40 GHz Front End 141 6.3 18–40 GHz Integrated Compact Switched Filter Bank Module 154 6.4 FSU Performance 163 6.5 FSU Design and Analysis 171 6.6 FSU Fabrication 181 6.7 Conclusions 184 References 185 7 Integrated Outdoor Unit for Millimeter-Wave Satellite Communication Applications 187 7.1 The ODU Description 187 7.2 The Low Noise Unit: LNB 191 7.3 SSPA Output Power Requirements 191 7.4 Isolation Between Receiving and Transmitting Channels 192 7.5 SSPA 192 7.6 The ODU Mechanical Package 194 7.7 Low Noise and Low-cost K-band Compact Receiving Channel for VSAT Satellite Communication Ground Terminal 195 7.8 Ka-band Integrated High Power Amplifiers SSPA for VSAT Satellite Communication Ground Terminal 200 7.9 Conclusions 205 References 206 8 MIC and MMIC Integrated RF Heads 209 8.1 Integrated Ku-band Automatic Tracking System 209 8.2 Super Compact X-band Monopulse Transceiver 233 References 243 9 MIC and MMIC Components and Modules Design 245 9.1 Introduction 245 9.2 Passive Elements 245 9.3 Power Dividers and Combiners 249 9.4 RF Amplifiers 256 9.5 Linearity of RF Amplifiers and Active Devices 262 9.6 Wideband Phased Array Direction Finding System 270 9.7 Conclusions 277 References 279 10 Microelectromechanical Systems (MEMS) Technology 281 10.1 Introduction 281 10.2 MEMS Technology 281 10.3 W-band MEMS Detection Array 285 10.4 Array Fabrication and Measurement 291 10.5 Mutual Coupling Effects Between Pixels 293 10.6 MEMS Bow-tie Dipole with Bolometer 294 10.7 220 GHz Microstrip Patch Antenna 294 10.8 Conclusions 294 References 297 11 Low-Temperature Cofired Ceramic (LTCC) Technology 299 11.1 Introduction 299 11.2 LTCC and HTCC Technology Features 300 11.3 LTCC and HTCC Technology Process 301 11.4 Design of High-pass LTCC Filters 301 11.5 Comparison of Single-layer and Multilayer Microstrip Circuits 305 11.6 LTCC Multilayer Technology Design Considerations 308 11.7 Capacitor and Inductor Quality (Q) Factor 310 11.8 Summary of LTCC Process Advantages and Limitations 312 11.9 Conclusions 312 References 313 12 Advanced Antenna Technologies for Communication System 315 12.1 New Wideband Wearable Metamaterial Antennas for Communication Applications 315 12.2 Stacked Patch Antenna Loaded with SRR 325 12.3 Patch Antenna Loaded with Split Ring Resonators 327 12.4 Metamaterial Antenna Characteristics in Vicinity to the Human Body 329 12.5 Metamaterial Wearable Antennas 333 12.6 Wideband Stacked Patch with SRR 336 12.7 Fractal Printed Antennas 338 12.8 Antiradar Fractals and/or Multilevel Chaff Dispersers 341 12.9 Definition of Multilevel Fractal Structure 342 12.10 Advanced Antenna System 344 12.11 Applications of Fractal Printed Antennas 348 12.12 Conclusions 364 References 367 13 Wearable Communication and Medical Systems 369 13.1 Wearable Antennas for Communication and Medical Applications 369 13.2 Dually Polarized Wearable 434 MHz Printed Antenna 370 13.3 Loop Antenna with Ground Plane 374 13.4 Antenna S 11 Variation as Function of Distance from Body 377 13.5 Wearable Antennas 381 13.6 Compact Dual-Polarized Printed Antenna 385 13.7 Compact Wearable RFID Antennas 385 13.8 434 MHz Receiving Channel for Communication and Medical Systems 394 13.9 Conclusions 395 References 398 14 RF Measurements 401 14.1 Introduction 401 14.2 Multiport Networks with N-ports 402 14.3 Scattering Matrix 403 14.4 S-Parameters Measurements 404 14.5 Transmission Measurements 407 14.6 Output Power and Linearity Measurements 409 14.7 Power Input Protection Measurement 409 14.8 Nonharmonic Spurious Measurements 410 14.9 Switching Time Measurements 410 14.10 IP 2 Measurements 410 14.11 IP 3 Measurements 412 14.12 Noise Figure Measurements 414 14.13 Antenna Measurements 414 14.14 Antenna Range Setup 419 References 420 Index 421

Read more less

Book SynopsisShoot, edit, and share action-packed video with a GoPro The world moves fastso if you want to capture it in real time, only a fast-moving camera will do. Enter the GoPro! This small but powerful camera is easy to hold, wear, or mount to capture video of all your high-speed adventures. Unfortunately, to the uninitiated, it can be a bit intimidatingbut fear not! With the help of this revised edition of GoPro Cameras For Dummies, you''ll acquire the skills needed to shoot high-quality video or photos, edit raw footage into a final masterpiece, and share your GoPro works of art with the world. Compared with traditional digital video devices, the GoPro is a superhero. Okay, so it can''t scale high rises, but it can go virtually anywhere and produce thrilling new perspectives of an epic slalom down the slopes or awesomely scenic hikeand everything in between. When still photos simply won''t do the trick, GoPro Cameras For Dummies shows you step by step how tTable of ContentsIntroduction 1 Part 1: Getting Started with Your GoPro Camera 5 Chapter 1: Getting to Know GoPro 7 Chapter 2: Accessorize Me 33 Part 2: Moviemaking Technique 53 Chapter 3: Getting through GoPro Boot Camp 55 Chapter 4: Understanding Effective Camera Techniques 75 Chapter 5: Framing the Shot 91 Chapter 6: Shooting Fun Stuff with Your GoPro 111 Chapter 7: Mastering the Light 133 Chapter 8: Of Sound Movie and Body 155 Part 3: Movies Are Made in Postproduction 169 Chapter 9: Equipping Your Edit Station 171 Chapter 10: Getting to Know GoPro Studio Edit 185 Chapter 11: Editing with GoPro Studio Edit 205 Chapter 12: Presenting Your Movie 225 Part 4: The Part of Tens 243 Chapter 13: Ten Fun Ways to Use Your GoPro 245 Chapter 14: Ten Professional Uses for GoPro Cameras 257 Chapter 15: Ten Pitfalls to Avoid 267 Chapter 16: Ten Ways to Improve Your Moviemaking Skills 277 Index 287

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis popular reference describes the integration of wind-generated power into electrical power systems and, with the use of advanced control systems, illustrates how wind farms can be made to operate like conventional power plants.Table of ContentsPreface xi Notation xiii 1 Wind Energy Power Plants 1 1.1 Wind Turbine Structures 1 1.2 A Brief History 4 1.3 Milestones of Development 5 1.4 Functional Structures of Wind Turbines 20 References 30 2 Wind Energy Conversion Systems 31 2.1 Drive Torque and Rotor Power 31 2.1.1 Inputs and outputs of a wind turbine 31 2.1.2 Power extraction from the airstream 32 2.1.3 Determining power or driving torque by the blade element method 34 2.1.4 Simplifying the computation method 38 2.1.5 Modeling turbine characteristics 40 2.2 Turbines 46 2.2.1 Hub and turbine design 50 2.2.2 Rotor blade geometry 51 2.3 Power Control by Turbine Manipulation 57 2.3.1 Turbine yawing 57 2.3.2 Rotor blade pitch variation 67 2.3.3 Limiting power by stall control 97 2.3.4 Power control using speed variation 100 2.4 Mechanical Drive Trains 102 2.5 System Data of a Wind Power Plant 108 2.5.1 Turbine and drive train data 108 2.5.2 Machine and tower masses 110 2.5.3 Machine costs 111 References 116 3 Generating Electrical Energy from Mechanical Energy 119 3.1 Constraints and Demands on the Generator 119 3.2 Energy Converter Systems 122 3.2.1 Asynchronous generator construction 125 3.2.2 Synchronous generator construction 126 3.3 Operational Ranges of Asynchronous and Synchronous Machines 126 3.4 Static and Dynamic Torque 132 3.4.1 Static torque 133 3.4.2 Dynamic torque 147 3.5 Generator Simulation 154 3.5.1 Synchronous machines 155 3.5.2 Asynchronous machines 160 3.6 Design Aspects 161 3.6.1 Asynchronous generators 162 3.6.2 Synchronous generators for gearless plants 174 3.6.3 Multi-generator concept (Dissertation A. Ezzahraoui) 187 3.6.4 Ring generator with magnetic bearings (Dissertation K. Messol) 194 3.6.5 Compact superconductive and other new generator concepts 197 3.7 Machine Data 199 3.7.1 Mass and cost relationships 200 3.7.2 Characteristic values of asynchronous machines 202 3.7.3 Characteristic values of synchronous machines 204 References 208 4 The Transfer of Electrical Energy to the Supply Grid 210 4.1 Power Conditioning and Grid Connection 210 4.1.1 Converter systems 212 4.1.2 Power semiconductors for converters 215 4.1.3 Functional characteristics of power converters 218 4.1.4 Converter designs 222 4.1.5 Indirect converter 223 4.1.6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 236 4.1.7 Protective measures during power conditioning 237 4.2 Grid Protection 238 4.2.1 Fuses and grid disconnection 239 4.2.2 Short-circuiting power 239 4.2.3 Increase of short-circuit power 242 4.2.4 Isolated operation and rapid auto-reclosure 245 4.2.5 Overvoltages in the event of grid faults 247 4.3 Grid Effects 247 4.3.1 General compatibility and interference 247 4.3.2 Output behavior of wind power plants 248 4.3.3 Voltage response in grid supply 260 4.3.4 Harmonics and subharmonics 271 4.3.5 Voltage faults and the fault-ride-through (FRT) 279 4.4 Resonance Effects in the Grid During Normal Operation 284 4.5 Remedial Measures against Grid Effects and Grid Resonances 290 4.5.1 Filters 290 4.5.2 Filter design 292 4.5.3 Function of harmonic absorber filters and compensation units 293 4.5.4 Grid-specific filter layout 294 4.5.5 Utilizing compensating effects 297 4.6 Grid Control and Protection 300 4.6.1 Supply by wind turbines 300 4.6.2 Grid support and grid control with wind turbines and other renewable systems 301 4.6.3 Central reactive power control 305 4.6.4 System services and operation 308 4.6.5 Connection of wind turbine to the transmission grid 310 4.7 Grid Connection Rules 311 4.8 Grid Connection in the Offshore Region 317 4.8.1 Offshore wind farm properties 317 4.8.2 Stationary and dynamic behavior of offshore wind farms 319 4.8.3 Wind farm and cluster formation at sea and grid connection 319 4.8.4 Electrical energy transmission to the mainland 323 4.8.5 Reactive power requirement and reactive power provision in the offshore grid 325 4.8.6 Flexible AC transmission systems (FACTS) 330 4.9 Integration of the Wind Energy into the Grid and Provision of Energy 333 4.9.1 Grid extension 333 4.9.2 Provision of energy 335 4.9.3 Control and reserve power 337 4.9.4 Power reserve provision with wind farms (Dissertation A. J. Gesino) 338 4.9.5 Intercontinental grid connections 346 References 346 5 Control and Supervision of Wind Turbines 355 5.1 System Requirements and Operating Modes 356 5.2 Isolated Operation of Wind Turbines 358 5.2.1 Turbines without a blade pitch adjustment mechanism 359 5.2.2 Plants with a blade pitch adjustment mechanism 360 5.2.3 Plants with load management 362 5.2.4 Turbine control by means of a bypass 362 5.3 Grid Operation of Wind Turbines 363 5.4 Control Concepts 367 5.4.1 Control in isolated operation 367 5.4.2 Regulation of variable-speed turbines 371 5.4.3 Regulation of variable-slip asynchronous generators 373 5.4.4 Regulation of turbines with a rigid connection to the grid 388 5.4.5 Wind turbine control using hydrodynamic variable-speed superimposing gears 390 5.5 Controller Design 390 5.5.1 Adjustment processes and torsional moments at the rotor blades 392 5.5.2 Standardizing and linearizing the variables 395 5.5.3 Control circuits and simplified dimensioning 400 5.5.4 Improving the control characteristics 404 5.5.5 Control design for wind turbines 410 5.6 Management System 411 5.6.1 Operating states 412 5.6.2 Faults 423 5.6.3 Determining the state of system components 424 5.7 Monitoring and Safety Systems 424 5.7.1 Wind measuring devices 425 5.7.2 Oscillation monitoring 425 5.7.3 Grid surveillance and lightning protection 426 5.7.4 Surveillance computer 426 5.7.5 Fault prediction 427 5.7.6 Voltage limitation 429 References 430 6 Using Wind Energy 436 6.1 Wind Conditions and Energy Yields 436 6.1.1 Global wind conditions 436 6.1.2 Local wind conditions and annual available power from the wind 438 6.1.3 Calculation of site-specific and regional turbine yields 440 6.1.4 Wind atlas methods 444 6.2 Potential and Expansion 449 6.2.1 Wind energy use on land 449 6.2.2 Offshore wind energy use 451 6.2.3 Repowering 453 6.3 Economic Considerations 455 6.3.1 Purchase and maintenance costs 457 6.3.2 Power supply and financial yields 457 6.3.3 Blue section 460 6.3.4 Commercial calculation methods 461 6.4 Legal Aspects and the Installation of Turbines 463 6.4.1 Immission protection 464 6.4.2 Nature and landscape conservation 467 6.4.3 Building laws 468 6.4.4 Planning and planning permission 469 6.4.5 Procedure for erecting a wind turbine 470 6.4.6 Offshore utilization of wind energy 472 6.5 Ecological Balance 474 6.5.1 Contribution to climate protection 474 6.5.2 Landscape utilization 475 6.5.3 Bird strike 475 6.5.4 Bats 475 6.5.5 Recycling of wind turbines 475 6.5.6 Energetic amortization time and harvest factor 476 References 476 Index 483

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of Contents 1 • AN INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING PROBLEM SOLVING 2 • GETTING STARTED WITH MATLAB 3 • MATLAB FUNCTIONS 4 • PLOTTING 5 • CONTROL STRUCTURES 6 • MATRIX COMPUTATIONS 7 • SYMBOLIC MATHEMATICS 8 • NUMERICAL TECHNIQUES INDEX

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive guide to wind farm noise prediction, measurement, assessment, control and effects on people Wind Farm Noise covers all aspects associated with the generation, measurement, propagation, regulation and adverse health effects of noise produced by large horizontal-axis wind turbines of the type used in wind farms. The book begins with a brief history of wind turbine development and the regulation of their noise at sensitive receivers. Also included is an introductory chapter on the fundamentals of acoustics relevant to wind turbine noise so that readers are well prepared for understanding later chapters on noise measurements, noise generation mechanisms, noise propagation modelling and the assessment of the noise at surrounding residences. Key features: Potential adverse health effects of wind farm noise are discussed in an objective way. Means for calculating the noise at residences due to a wind farm prior to conTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Wind Energy and Noise 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Development of the Wind Energy Industry 2 1.3 History of Wind Turbine Noise Studies 13 1.4 Current Wind Farm Noise Guidelines and Assessment Procedures 18 1.5 Wind Farm Noise Standards 30 1.6 Regulations 33 1.7 Enquiries/Government Investigations 44 1.8 Current Consensus on Wind Farm Noise 53 References 55 2 Fundamentals of Acoustics 59 2.1 Introduction 59 2.2 Basic Acoustics Concepts 59 2.3 Basic Frequency Analysis 82 2.4 Advanced Frequency Analysis 89 2.5 Summary 121 References 122 3 Noise Generation 123 3.1 Introduction 123 3.2 Aeroacoustics 125 3.3 Aerodynamic noise generation on wind turbines 131 3.4 Aeroelasticity and Noise 152 3.5 Other Noise Sources 153 3.6 Summary and Outlook 155 References 157 4 Wind Turbine Sound Power Estimation 161 4.1 Introduction 161 4.2 Aerodynamic noise prediction 161 4.3 Simple models 162 4.4 Semi-empirical methods (Class II models) 163 4.5 Computational methods (Class III models) 173 4.6 Estimations of Sound Power From Measurements 174 4.7 Summary 182 References 183 5 Noise propagation 185 5.1 Introduction 185 5.2 Principles Underpinning Noise Propagation Modelling 186 5.3 Simplest Noise Propagation Models 217 5.4 Danish Low-Frequency Propagation Model 219 5.5 CONCAWE (1981) 220 5.6 ISO9613-2 (1996) Noise Propagation Model 229 5.7 NMPB-2008 Noise Propagation Model 238 5.8 Nord2000 Noise Propagation Model 250 5.9 Harmonoise (2002) Noise Propagation Engineering Model 269 5.10 Required Input Data for the Various Propagation Models 277 5.11 Off-Shore Wind Farm Propagation Models 281 5.12 Propagation Model Prediction Uncertainty 281 5.13 Outside vs Inside Noise at Residences 286 5.14 Vibration Propagation 289 5.15 Summary 294 References 295 6 Measurement 299 6.1 Introduction 299 6.2 Measurement of Environmental Noise Near Wind Farms 300 6.3 Vibration 406 6.4 Wind, Wind Shear and Turbulence 408 6.5 Reporting on Noise, Vibration and Meteorological Conditions 417 6.6 Wind Tunnel Testing 423 6.7 Conclusions 439 References 440 7 Effects of wind farm noise and vibration on people 447 7.1 Introduction 447 7.2 Annoyance and Adverse Health Effects 452 7.3 Hearing Mechanism 466 7.4 Reproduction of Wind Farm Noise for Adverse Effects Studies 476 7.5 Vibration Effects 478 7.6 Nocebo Effect 479 7.7 Summary and Conclusion 480 References 482 8 Wind Farm Noise Control 487 8.1 Introduction 487 8.2 Noise Control by Turbine Design Modification 488 8.3 Optimisation of turbine layout 498 8.4 Options for Noise Control at the Residences 499 8.5 Administrative Controls 503 8.6 Summary 504 References 505 9 Where to from here 507 9.1 Introduction 507 9.2 Further Investigation of the Effects of Wind Farm Noise on People 508 9.3 Improvements to Regulations and Guidelines 510 9.4 Propagation Model Improvements 515 9.5 Identification and Amelioration of the Problem Noise Sources on Wind Turbines 516 9.6 Reducing Low-Frequency Noise Levels in Residences 517 References 518 A Basic mathematics 519 A.1 Introduction 519 A.2 Logarithms 519 A.3 Complex Numbers 520 A.4 Exponential Function 520 B The BPM model 521 B.1 Boundary layer parameters 521 B.2 Turbulent trailing edge noise model 523 B.3 Blunt trailing edge noise model 525 References 527 C Ground Reflection Coefficient Calculations 529 C.1 Introduction 529 C.2 Flow Resistivity 530 C.3 Characteristic Impedance 530 C.4 Plane Wave Reflection Coefficient 533 C.5 Spherical Wave Reflection Coefficient 533 C.6 Incoherent Reflection Coefficient 537 References 539 D Calculation of Ray Path Distances and Propagation Times for the Nord2000 Model 541 D.1 Introduction 541 D.2 Equivalent Linear Atmospheric Vertical Sound Speed Profile 542 D.3 Calculation of Ray Path Lengths and Propagation Times 544 D.3.1 Direct ray 544 D.3.2 Reflected ray 546 References 549 E Calculation of Terrain Parameters for the Nord2000 Sound Propagation Model 551 E.1 Introduction 551 E.2 Terrain Effects 551 E.3 Approximating Terrain profiles by Straight Line Segments 556 E.4 Calculation of the Excess Attenuation Due to the Ground Effect for Relatively Flat Terrain with no Diffraction Edges 558 E.5 Calculation of the Excess Attenuation Due to the Ground Effect for Relatively Flat Terrain with a Variable Impedance Surface and no Diffraction Edges 559 E.6 Calculation of the Excess Attenuation Due to the Ground Effect for Valley-Shaped Terrain 561 E.7 Identification of the Two Most Efficient Diffraction Edges 561 E.8 Calculation of the Sound Pressure at the Receiver for Each Diffracted Path in Hilly Terrain 564 E.9 Calculation of the Combined Ground and Barrier Excess Attenuation Effects 575 References 583 F Calculation of Fresnel Zone Sizes and Weights 585 F.1 Introduction 585 F.2 Fresnel Zone for Reflection From Flat Ground 585 F.3 Fresnel Weights for Reflection From a Concave or Transition Ground Segment589 F.4 Fresnel Weights for Reflection from a Convex Ground Segment 591 References 592 G Calculation of Diffraction and Ground Effects for the Harmonoise Model 593 G.1 Introduction 593 G.2 Diffraction Effect, _LD 596 G.3 Ground Effect 598 G.3.1 Concave model 600 G.3.2 Transition model 604 G.4 Fresnel Zone for Reflection from a Ground Segment 606 References 610 H Active Noise Control System Algorithms 611 H.1 Introduction 611 References 616

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe only book that covers fundamental shipboard design and verification concepts from individual devices to the system level Shipboard electrical system design and development requirements are fundamentally different from utility-based power generation and distribution requirements. Electrical engineers who are engaged in shipbuilding must understand various design elements to build both safe and energy-efficient power distribution systems. This book covers all the relevant technologies and regulations for building shipboard power systems, which include commercial ships, naval ships, offshore floating platforms, and offshore support vessels. In recent years, offshore floating platforms have been frequently discussed in exploring deep-water resources such as oil, gas, and wind energy. This book presents step-by-step shipboard electrical system design and verification fundamentals and provides information on individual electrical devices and practical design examples, along with ampleTable of ContentsPreface xix 1. Overview 1 1.0 Introduction 1 1.1 Shipboard Power System Design Fundamentals 3 1.2 Ship Design Requirements 3 1.3 ETO Certification: MEECE 4 1.4 Legacy System Design Development and Verification 4 1.5 Shipboard Electrical System Design Verification and Validation (V&V) 5 1.5.1 Verification and Validation (V&V) Overview 5 1.5.2 Verification 5 1.5.2a Acceptance of Verification 8 1.5.3 Validation 8 1.5.4 Differences between Verification and Validation: Shipboard Electrical System Design and Development Process 8 1.6 IEEE 45 DOT Standards: Recommended Practice for Shipboard Electrical Installation 10 1.7 Other Rules and Regulations, and Standards in Support of IEEE 45 DOT Standards 11 1.8 Shipboard Ungrounded Power System 11 1.9 Shipboard Electrical Design Basics 12 1.10 Electrical Design Plan Submittal Requirements 14 1.11 ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels 15 1.12 Shipboard Electrical Safety Considerations 17 1.13 High-Resistance Grounding Requirements for Shipboard Ungrounded Systems (See Chapter 9 for Details) 18 1.14 Shipboard Electrical Safety Considerations 19 1.14.1 Arc Flash Basics (See Section 12 for Details) 19 1.14.2 Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Procedures 20 1.14.3 Warning Label Placement 21 1.15 Propulsion Power Requirements (IEEE Std 45-2002, Clause 7.4.2) 21 1.16 IMO-Solas Electric Propulsion Power Redundancy Requirements 22 1.17 Regulatory Requirements for Emergency Generator 23 1.18 USCG Dynamic Positioning (DP) Guidelines 24 1.19 IEC/ISO/IEEE 80005-1-2012: Utility Connections in Port—High Voltage Shore Connection (HVSC) Systems—General Requirements 28 1.20 Mil Standard 1399 Medium Voltage Power System Characteristics 28 1.21 Shipboard Power Quality and Harmonics (See Chapter 7 for Detail Requirements) 29 1.21.1 IEEE Std 45-2002, Clause 4.6, Power Quality and Harmonics 29 1.21.2 Power Conversion Equipment-Related Power Quality 30 1.21.2a IEEE Std 45-2002, Clause 31.8, Propulsion Power Conversion Equipment (Power Quality) 30 1.22 USCG Plan Submittal Requirements 31 1.23 ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels (Partial Listing) 32 1.24 Design Verification and Validation 33 1.24.1 Design Verification Test Procedure (DVTP) 33 1.24.2 Qualitative Failure Analysis (QFA) 36 1.24.3 IEEE 519 Harmonic Standard 36 1.25 Remarks for VFD Applications Onboard Ship 36 2. Electrical System Design Fundamentals and Verifications 37 2.0 Introduction 37 2.1 Design Basics 39 2.2 Marine Environmental Condition Requirements for the Shipboard Electrical System Design 40 2.3 Power System Characteristics: MIL-STD-1399 Power Requirements 41 2.4 ABS Type Approval Procedure (Taken From ABS Directives) 42 2.4.1 List of Recognized Laboratories 45 2.4.2 Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Program 45 2.4.3 Procedure for Becoming Type Approved 47 2.5 Shipboard Electrical Power System Design Basics 48 2.5.1 Table 2.4: Explanation for Note 1 of Figure 2.1 (Use of Multiple Options, Step Down Transformer, MG Set,PCU) 49 2.5.2 Table 2.5: Explanation for Note 2 of Figure 2.1 (Use of Power Conversion Unit to Supply Power from MV SWBD to the Ship Service SWBD) 50 2.5.3 Table 2.6: Explanation for Note 3 of Figure 2.1 (Use of Motor Generator with MV Input to AC Motor and Driving AC Generator) 51 2.5.4 Table 2.7: Explanation for Note 4 of Figure 2.1 (High-PowerBattery Supplying Power to the 480 V Ship Service Switchboard) 51 2.5.5 Table 2.8: Explanation for Note 5 of Figure 2.1 (Use of Step Down Service Transformer to Supply Power from MV SWBD to the Ship Service SWBD) 52 2.5.6 Table 2.9: Explanation for Note 6 of Figure 2.1 (Variable Frequency of Adjustable Drive for Electrical Propulsion Application) 53 2.6 Shipboard Electrical Standard Voltages 53 2.6.1 NORSOK Standard 6.1 System Voltage and Frequency 54 2.7 Voltage and Frequency Range (MIL-STD-1399) 55 2.8 Ungrounded System Concept (ANSI and IEC) 55 2.9 Concept Design 56 2.9.1 Power Generation 56 2.9.2 Power Distribution 56 2.10 Design Features Outlined in 56 2.11 Protective Device–Circuit Breaker Characteristics 57 2.12 Fault Current Calculation and Analysis Requirement 57 2.12.1 Fault Current Calculation Fundamentals 59 2.13 Adjustable Drive Fundamentals 59 2.13.1 Advantages of ASD for Shipboard Application 59 2.13.2 Disadvantages of VFD/ASD for Shipboard Application 61 2.14 Fundamentals of ASD Noise Management 61 2.15 Electrical Noise Management (See Chapter 7 for Additional Details) 62 2.16 Motor Protection Solutions: DV/DT Motor Protection Output Filter 64 3. Power System Design, Development, and Verification 67 3.0 Introduction: Design, Development, and Verification Process 67 3.1 Typical Design and Development of Power Generation and Distribution (See Figure 3.1) 67 3.2 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA): Design Fundamentals 68 3.2.1 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) 68 3.3 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) Electric Propulsion System Diesel Generator: Design Fundamentals 70 3.3.1 Diesel Engine Operational Mode Selection 70 3.3.2 Diesel Generator Safety System Functions 71 3.3.3 Power Management Overview Mimic (Central Control Station and Switchboard) 72 3.3.4 Power Distribution Mimic Page 73 3.4 Design Verification: General 73 3.4.1 Qualitative Failure Analysis (QFA) 73 3.4.2 Qualitative Failure Analysis (QFA) Basics 74 3.4.3 Process Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA): General 74 3.4.4 Qualitative Failure Analysis (QFA)-1 75 3.4.5 Explanation of the Detail Design Using QFA 75 3.4.6 Design Verification Test Procedure (DVTP): General 75 3.4.7 Example-1: Propulsion Plant (DVTP) Design Verification Test Procedure 77 3.5 Ship Service Power System Design: System-Level Fundamentals (Figure 3.2) 78 3.6 Single Shaft Electric Propulsion (Figure 3.3) 79 3.7 Electrical Generation and Distribution with Detail Design Information (Figure 3.4) 81 3.8 Electric Propulsion and Power Conversion Unit for Ship Service Distribution (Figure 3.5) 83 3.9 6600V and 690V Adjustable Speed Application with High-Resistance Grounding-1 (Figure 3.6) 85 3.10 MV and 690V Adjustable Speed Application with High-Resistance Grounding (Figure 3.7) 87 3.11 Fully Integrated Power System Design with Adjustable Speed Drive (Figure 3.8) 89 3.12 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Voltage Ratings and System Protection 91 3.13 Example 460V, Three-Phase, Full Wave Bridge Circuit Feeding Into a Capacitive Filter to Create a 650 VDC Power Supply 91 3.14 Special Cable and Cable Termination Requirements for Variable Frequency Drive Application 91 3.15 Harmonic Management Requirements for Variable Frequency Drive Application 91 3.16 Switchgear Bus Bar Ampacity, Dimension, and Space Requirements 93 3.16.1 Bus Bar Rating for English Dimensions (Inches) 93 3.16.2 Bus Bar Rating for Metric Dimensions (Millimeter:MM) 94 3.16.3 Nominal Working Space Requirements 95 3.17 MEECE (Management of Electrical and Electronics Control Equipment) Course Outline Requirements: USCG 96 4. Power Generation and Distribution 99 4.0 Introduction 99 4.1 Generation System Requirements 101 4.2 IEEE Std 45-2002, ABS-2002 and IEC for Generator Size and Rating Selection 104 4.3 ABS-2002 Section 4-8-2-3.1.3 Generator Engine Starting from Dead Ship Condition (Extract) 106 4.4 Additional Details of Sizing Ship Service Generators 109 4.4.1 Engine Governor Characteristics 110 4.4.2 Generator Voltage Regulator Characteristics 110 4.4.3 How AVR works: 111 4.4.4 Droop Characteristics: Generator Set 111 4.5 Typical Generator Prime Mover 112 4.6 Generator: Typical Purchase Specification (Typical Electrical Propulsion System) 113 5. Emergency Power System Design and Development 115 5.0 Introduction 115 5.1 USCG 46 CFR Requirements: 112.05 (Extract Only) 116 5.2 IEEE STD 45-2002, Clause 6.1, General (Extract) 117 5.3 Emergency Source of Electrical Power: ABS 2010, 5.1.1 Requirement 118 5.4 ABS Emergency Generator Starting Requirement (ABS Rule for Passenger Vessels) 118 5.5 Typical Emergency Generation and Distribution System 119 5.6 Emergency Generator and Emergency Transformer Rating: Load Analysis (Sample Calculation) 120 5.7 Emergency Power Generation and Distribution with Ship Service Power and Distribution System 120 5.8 Emergency Transformer 450 V/120V (Per ABS) 120 5.9 Emergency Generator Starting Block Diagram 120 5.10 Emergency Generation and Distribution Design Verification 122 5.11 No-Break Emergency Power Distribution 123 6. Protection and Verification 124 6.0 Introduction: Protection System Fundamentals 124 6.1 Protective Device: Glossary 126 6.2 Power System Protections 128 6.3 Power System: Procedure for Protective Device Coordination 131 6.4 Fault Current Calculation Guidelines (Per USCG Requirements) 132 6.5 Overall Protection Synopsis 132 6.6 ANSI Electrical Device Numbering (for Device Number Details Refer to ANSI C.37.2) 135 6.7 Fault Current Calculations (Per USCG Requirements CFR 111-52-3(B) & (C)) 136 6.7.1 Maximum Asymmetrical Fault Current 137 6.7.2 Average Asymmetrical Fault Current 137 6.7.3 450 V Switchboard Rating 138 6.7.4 450 V Switchboard Circuit Breaker Rating 138 6.7.5 Fault Current Calculation for the 120 Voltage System is as follows 138 6.7.6 RMS Symmetric Current 138 6.7.7 Fault Current Calculation Summary 138 6.8 Details for Figure 6.3 Typical EOL for MV Generator Protection System: Split Bus with Two Bustie Breakers 141 6.9 Details for Figure 6-4: Typical EOL for MV Generator Protection System: Split Bus with Two Bustie Breakers 143 6.10 Details for Figure 6.5 Typical for Transformer Protection Schematic 144 6.11 Details for Figure 6.10: Typical EOL for MV VFD Transformer Protection Schematic 145 6.11.1 Low Overcurrent Setting: (I>) 149 6.11.2 High Overcurrent Setting: (I>>) 150 6.11.3 Conclusion of Calculation 150 6.12 Power System Dynamic Calculations 155 6.13 Protective Relay Coordination and Discrimination Study 155 7. Power Quality: Harmonics 158 7.0 Introduction 158 7.1 Solid-State Devices Carrier Frequency 160 7.2 MIL-STD-1399 Requirements 162 7.3 IEEE STD 519 Requirements (1992 and 2014 Versions) 162 7.3.1 Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) 164 7.3.2 Total Demand Distortion (TDD): Current Harmonics 165 7.4 Calculate the RMS Harmonic Voltage Due to the Respective Harmonic Current 165 7.5 Current Harmonic Matters 167 7.6 Harmonic Numbering 167 7.7 DNV Regulation: Harmonic Distortion 168 7.8 Examples of Typical Shipboard Power System Harmonic Current Calculations 169 7.9 Choice of 18-Pulse Drive versus 6-Pulse Drive with Active Harmonic Filter 171 7.10 Typical Software to Calculate Total Harmonic Distortion and Filter Applications 172 7.11 Harmonic Recommendations (IEEE 45.1 Partial Extract) 175 7.12 Harmonic Silencing and ARC Prevention (Curtsey of Applied Energy) 180 7.13 Applicable Power Quality Standards Include 184 8. Shipboard Cable Application and Verification 185 8.0 Introduction: Shipboard Cable Application 185 8.1 Cable Size Calculation Fundamentals 185 8.2 Shipboard Cable for ASD and VFD Applications 186 8.3 Cable Requirements Per IEEE Std 45 186 8.4 Cable Shielding Guide Per IEEE Std 1143 187 8.5 Cable: Physical Characteristics 192 8.6 Cable Insulation: Typical 197 8.7 Cable Ampacity 199 8.8 Commercial Shipboard Cable Circuit Designation 203 8.9 Example 1: Low-Voltage 600 V/1000V IEC Cable Details 205 8.10 Example 2: MV Voltage 8 KV/10 KV 206 8.11 Example 3: VFD Cable LV (600 V/100) and MV VOLTAGE (8 KV/10 KV) 208 8.12 Ground Conductor Size 208 8.13 Develop Math to Calculate the Ground Conductor for Parallel Run 209 8.14 Cable Designation Type (Typical Ship Service Cable Symbol or Designation) 209 8.15 Cable Color Code: Shipboard Commercial Cable 210 8.16 ASD (VFD) Cable Issues for Shipboard Application 211 8.17 ABS Steel Vessel Rule: Part 4, Chapter 8, Section 4: Shipboard Cable Application 212 8.18 Grounding Conductor Size: for Cable Rated 2 KV or Less for Single Run 214 9. Grounding, Insulation Monitoring Design, and Verification 216 9.0 Introduction 216 9.1 System Grounding Per IEEE 45 217 9.1.1 Shipboard LV Power System Grounding IEEE 45 Recommendations (See Figures 9.1 and 9.2) 217 9.2 Selection of High-Resistance Grounding (HRG) System 219 9.3 IEEE 142 Ground Detection Requirements 220 9.4 IEC Requirements: Insulation Monitoring System 221 9.4.1 Insulation Monitoring 224 9.4.2 Insulation Monitoring System for Grounded AC Systems with VFD System 224 9.5 System Capacitance to Ground Charging Current Calculation (Taken From IEEE 142 Figs. 1.6 and 1.9) 225 9.6 Total System Capacitance Calculation 225 9.7 Calculate Capacitive Charging Current: (for a Typical Installation) 226 9.8 Capacitive Charging Current Calculation: Sample Calculation 227 9.8.1 Iccc Calculation for Generators 12,000 kVA, 6600V, 3-Phase, 3-Wire—Total 4 227 9.8.2 Iccc Calculation for Transformers 227 9.8.3 Cables 8 kV—(4/0 AWG) (T-212) Cable Three Core 228 9.8.4 Total Capacitive Charging Current 228 9.8.5 Grounding Transformer Size Calculation 229 9.8.6 Grounding Resistor Size Calculation 229 9.9 Grounding Resistor Selection Guideline Per IEEE STD 32-1972 230 9.10 Grounding Resistor Duty Rating 231 9.11 Zigzag Grounding Transformers: IEEE STD 142 Section 1.5.2 232 9.12 Rating and Testing Neutral Grounding Resistors: IEEE STD 32-1972 233 9.13 Voltage Stabilizing Ground Reference (VSGR) Phaseback for Ground Detection (Curtsey of Applied Energy) 234 9.13.1 Typical HRG Elementary Diagrams are Very Close to the Voltage Stabilizing Ground Reference (VSGR) Phaseback Unit, Looking Alike Phaseback’s Function is Exactly Opposite to the HRG 238 9.13.2 Phaseback Voltage Stabilizing Ground Reference Addresses and Solves the Following Issues 239 9.14 HRG Versus VSGR 240 9.15 Shipboard Ground Detection System Recommendations 240 10. Shore Power LV and MV Systems 242 10.0 Introduction 242 10.1 LV Shore Power System 242 10.2 MV (HV) Shore Power System 243 10.3 Low-Voltage Shore Power System 250 10.4 Four-Wire Grounded System LV Shore Power Connections 253 10.5 Medium-Voltage Shore Power System (MV) 253 10.6 Extract from IEC/ISO/IEEE 80005-1 Part 1: High-Voltage Shore nConnection (HVSC) Systems HV Shore Power Requirements (Shore to Ship Power Quality and Protection Requirements) 256 11. Smart Ship System Design (S3D) and Verification 260 11.0 Introduction 260 11.1 Virtual Prototyping for Electrical System Design 261 11.2 Electrical Power System Smart Ship System Design FailureMode and Effect Analysis 264 11.3 Marine Technology Society (MTS) Guidelines for DP Vessel Design Philosophy: Guidelines for Modu DP System and Commercial Ships 266 11.4 Additional Marine Technology Society (MTS) Requirements Applicable for Ship Design: (USCG Recognized MTS Requirements) 266 11.5 Condition-based Maintenance 272 11.6 FMEA Objectives: S3D Concept 272 11.7 Additional S3D Process Safety Features 272 12. Electrical Safety and Arc Flash Analysis 274 12.0 Introduction 274 12.1 Injuries Result from Electrical-Current Shorts 274 12.2 General Safety Tips for Working with or Near Electricity 275 12.3 Arc Flash Basics 276 12.4 Fundamentals of Electrical Arc and Arc Flash 277 12.5 Definitions Related to Arc Flash (Derived from NFPA 70E NEC, NFPA 70E, and IEEE STD 1580 for Shipboard Electrical Installations) 278 12.6 Causes of Electric Arc 279 12.7 Incident Energy 279 12.8 Incident Energy at Arc Flash Protection Boundary 280 12.9 The Flash Protection Boundary 280 12.10 Electrical Hazards: Arc Flash with Associated Blast andShock 280 12.11 Shock Hazard 281 12.12 Hazard/Risk Categories (Derived from NFPE-70E) 282 12.12.1 Hazard/Risk Category: Description (HRC-0) 282 12.12.2 Hazard/Risk Category: Description (HRC-1) 282 12.12.3 Hazard/Risk Category: Description (HRC-2) 285 12.12.4 Hazard/Risk Category: Description (HRC-3) 285 12.12.5 Hazard/Risk Category: Description (HRC-4) 285 12.13 Shipboard Electrical Safety Compliance Chart per NFPA 70E 2012 Table 130.7.C.9 285 12.14 Arc Flash: OSHA Requirements (29 CFR 1910.333) 286 12.15 Arc Flash: National Electrical Code (NEC) Requirements 286 12.16 Arc Flash: NFPA 70E 2012 Requirements 287 12.17 Arc Flash Boundary: NFPA 70E 289 12.18 Low-Voltage (50 V–1000 V) Protection (NFPA 70E 130.3 (A1)) 290 12.19 Medium-Voltage (1000V and Above) (NFPA 70E 130.3 (A2)) 290 12.20 Arc Flash: IEEE 1584 Requirements and Guidelines 291 12.21 Arc Flash: Circuit Breaker Time Currect Coordination—Overview 292 12.22 Arc Flash Calculation Analysis and Spreadsheet Deliverables 296 12.22.1 For Shipboard Arc Flash Analysis the Following Should be Included 296 12.23 Methods of Developing Analysis 296 12.23.1 Coordination Study 296 12.24 Fault Current Analysis to Ensure Power System Component Protection Characteristics 296 12.25 Fault Current Calculation: Approximation for Arc Flash Analysis 297 12.26 Shipboard Fault Current Calculation Guidelines (per USCG Requirements) 298 12.27 Example Shipboard Fault Current Calculations (per USCG Requirements CFR 111-52-3(B) & (C)) 298 12.28 Shipboard Power System Short-Circuit Current Calculation (Refer to US Navy Design Data Sheet 300-2 for Details) 299 12.29 Fault Current and Arc Flash Analysis as Required by NFPA 70E 300 12.30 Fault Current and Arc Flash Analysis Guide by IEEE 1584 301 12.31 Electrical Safety and Arc Flash Labeling (NFPA 70E) 302 12.32 Arc Flash Protection-Boundary 303 12.33 Sample Arc Flash Calculations: Spreadsheet—Excel Type 304 12.33.1 NFPA 70E 2009 Equation D.5.2 (A) for Arc Flash Calculation 304 12.34 Low-Voltage (50 V–1000 V) Protection (NFPA 70E 130.3 (A1)) 304 12.35 Medium Voltage (1000V and Above) (NFPA 70E 130.3 (A2)) 304 12.36 IEEE 1584-Based Arc Flash Calculations 305 12.36.1 IEEE 1584: Incident Energy Exposure 305 12.36.2 IEEE 1584: Arcing Current Calculation: Up to 1000V Systems 305 12.36.3 IEEE 1584: Arcing Current Calculation for 1 kV to 15 kV 306 12.36.4 IEEE 1584: Flash Protection Boundary Calculation (DB) 306 12.36.5 IEEE 1584: Flash Protection Boundary 306 12.36.6 IEEE 1584: Level of PPE 306 12.36.7 IEEE-1584: Equipment Class 307 12.36.8 IEEE 1584: Distance Exponent 307 12.36.9 IEEE 1584: Arc Duration/Total Arc Clearing Time 308 12.36.10 IEEE 1584: Available Three-Phase Bolted Fault Current 308 12.36.11 IEEE 1584: Predicted Three-Phase Arcing Current 308 12.37 Sample Shipboard Arc Flash Calculation Project 310 12.37.1 General 310 12.37.2 Short-Circuit Study 310 12.37.3 Protective Device Coordination Study 310 12.37.4 Arc Flash Hazard Study 310 12.37.5 Analysis 310 12.37.6 Report 311 12.38 Fast-Acting Arc Management System: Arc Flash Mitigating Hardware Driven Time 311 12.39 Guidelines for Shipboard Personnel 312 Glossary 315 Index 325

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book answers the need for a practical, hands-on guide for assessing power stability in real time, rather than in offline simulations. Since the book is primarily geared toward the practical aspects of the subject, theoretical background is reduced to the strictest minimum. For the benefit of readers who may not be quite familiar with the underlying theoretical techniques, appendices describing key algorithms and theoretical issues are included at the end of the book. It is an excellent source for researchers, professionals, and advanced undergraduate and graduate students.Table of ContentsPreface. Contributors. 1 The Real-Time and Study-Mode Data Environment in Modern SCADA/EMS (Sudhir Virmani and Savu C. Savulescu). 1.1 Introduction. 1.2 SCADA/EMS Architectures. 1.3 Integrating Stability Applications with the SCADA/EMS. 1.4 References. 2 Overview of Key Stability Concepts Applied for Real-Time Operations (Savu C. Savulescu). 2.1 Introduction. 2.2 In Search of the Stability Limits. 2.3 Transient and Voltage Stability Limits. 2.4 Steady-State Stability Limits. 2.5 Concluding Remarks. 2.6 References. Annex 1-1. Reactive Power Steady-State Stability Criterion dΔQ/dV. 3 LIPA Implementation of Real-Time Stability Monitoring in a CIM Compliant Environment (Loris Arnold, Janos Hajagos, Susan M. Manessis, and Anie Philip). 3.1 Introduction. 3.2 Static and Dynamic Security Assessment at LIPA. 3.3 Benchmarking the Real-Time Stability Application. 3.4 Practical Experience and Outlook. 3.5 References. 4 Real-Time Stability Monitoring at the Independent System Operator in Bosnia and Herzegovina (Dusko Vickovic and Roland Eichler). 4.1 Introduction. 4.2 Interim Implementation of Real-Time Stability Assessment at NOS BiH. 4.3 Real-Time Stability Assessment in the New SCADA/EMS Environment. 4.4 Conclusions and Recommendations. 4.5 References. Annex 4-1. TSL, TTC, and the Stability Envelope. Annex 4-2. Siemens Implementation of the Continuation Power Flow. 5 Experience with Real-Time Stability Assessment at Transelectrica (Horia S. Campeanu, Cornel Erbasu, and Cornel Aldea). 5.1 Introduction. 5.2 Security Assessment Philosophy and Criteria. 5.3 Real-Time Steady-State Stability Assessment and Monitoring. 5.4 Off-Line Stability Tools in Support of System Operations. 5.5 Conclusions and Outlook. 5.6 References. 6 Implementation of Online Dynamic Security Assessment at Southern Company (Kip Morison, Lei Wang, Fred Howell, James Viikinsalo, and Alan Martin). 6.1 Introduction. 6.2 DSA Implementation Fundamentals. 6.3 Transient Security Assessment Implementation at Southern Company. 6.4 Conclusions. 6.5 References. Annex 6-1. Further Details of the DSA Software and Hardware Architecture. Description of the Core DSA Software. Online DSA Implementation Using DSATools. 7 Online Security Assessment for the Brazilian System?A Detailed Modeling Approach (Jorge L. Jardim). 7.1 Introduction. 7.2 Security Criteria and Functions. 7.3 Solution Methods and Architecture. 7.4 Practical Implementation Aspects. 7.5 User Interface And Performance. 7.6 Concluding Remarks. 7.7 Acknowledgments. 7.8 References. 8 Dynamic Network Security Analysis in a Load Dispatch Center (Guenther Beissler, Olaf Ruhle, and Roland Eichler). 8.1 Introduction. 8.2 Siemens Approach to Dynamic Security Assessment. 8.3 Case Studies: Challenges, Implementation Approach, and Solution Features. 8.4 References. Annex 8-1. Further Dynamic Simulation Capabilities. Time Frame for Dynamic Simulations. Simulation in the Frequency Domain. Eigenvalue and Modal Analysis. 9 Real-Time Transient Security Assessment in Australia at NEMMCO (Stephen J. Boroczky). 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 Transient Security Assessment at NEMMCO. 9.3 Performance and Reliability. 9.4 Experience, Benefits, and Outlook. 9.5 References. 10 Online Voltage Security Assessment in the Hellenic Interconnected System (Costas Vournas, George Christoforidis, and Thierry Van Cutsem). 10.1 Introduction. 10.2 The Control Center of HTSO. 10.3 Online VSA in the Hellenic System. 10.4 Use of Online VSA For Arming Load-Shedding Protection. 10.5 Conclusion. 10.6 References. Annex 10-1. Quasi-Steady-State Simulation. Principle of the QSS Approximation. Handling of Frequency in QSS Simulation. QSS Model of the Synchronous Machine and its Regulations. Numerical Integration of the QSS Model. 11 The Real-Time Supervision of Transmission Capacity in the Swedish Grid (Lars Sandberg and Klas Roudén). 11.1 Introduction. 11.2 Prior and Current Application Development at SVK. 11.3 Voltage Security Assessment with SPICA. 11.4 Benefiting from the Knowledge of the Current Transmission Capacity. 11.5 Additional SPICA Functionality. 11.6 Summary. Appendix A Dimo?s Approach to Steady-State Stability Assessment: Methodology Overview, Numerical Example, and Algorithm Validation (Roberto D. Molina Mylius, Martín Cassano, and Savu C. Savulescu). A.1 Methodology Overview. A.2 Numerical Example?Independent Testing of Algorithm Implementation. A.3 Benchmarking the Methodology. A.4 Conclusions. A.5 References. Appendix B SIME: A Comprehensive Approach to Transient Stability (Mania Pavella, Daniel Ruiz-Vega, and Mevludin Glavic). B.1 Introduction. B.2 Basic Formulation. B.3 Preventive SIME. B.4 Emergency SIME. B.5 Postface. B.6 References. Notation. Abbreviations and Acronyms. Appendix C Detection and Evaluation of Stability Constrained (Marius Pomarleanu and Savu C. Savulescu). C.1 Introduction. C.2 Approach. C.3 Conclusions. C.4 References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisDescribes the main computer modelling techniques that constitute the basic framework of modern power system analysis. Basic knowledge of power system theory, matrix analysis and numerical techniques is presumed, although appendices and references are included to provide the relevant background.Table of ContentsLoad Flow. Three-Phase Load Flow. A.C.-D.C. Load Flow. Faulted System Studies. Power System Stability--Basic Model. Power System Stability--Advanced Component Modeling. Analysis of Electromagnetic Transients. Analysis of Harmonic Propagation. Analysis of System Optimization and Security. A Graphical Power System Analysis Package. Appendices. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisDetails all the issues and applications of reliability engineering relevant to the use and purchase of equipment. Introduces reliability terminology for the non-specialist. Discusses product procurement based on life cycle cost, the total expenditure of ownership as opposed to merely acquisition, procurement dependability specifications, equipment inspection frequency, optimization of replacement, overhaul tactics and schedules. Explains how to collect, analyze and monitor field failure data in order to build up dependable reliability data banks for future use.Table of ContentsPartial table of contents: Reliability Basics. Probability Concepts and Applications. Mean Time to Failure and Mean Time Between Failures. LIFE CYCLE COST PROCUREMENT. Life Cycle Cost: Concepts, Constituents and Models. Dependability and Life Cycle Cost. PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATIONS. Allocation of Subsystem Dependability Needs. COMPARATIVE PRODUCT EVALUATION. Product Selection and Evaluation. FAILURE REPORTING AND DATA ANALYSIS. Failure Reporting and Analysis. Aging Analysis of Repairable Equipment. INSPECTION FREQUENCY OPTIMIZATION. Inspection Frequency Optimization. REPLACEMENT AND OVERHAUL POLICIES. Replacement Policies: Concepts, Methods and Models. Replacement with Ongoing Technological Change. Appendices. Selected Bibliography. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisFundamentals of Semiconductor Manufacturing and Process Control examines in detail the methodology by which electronic materials and supplies are converted into finished integrated circuits, and electronic products in a high-volume manufacturing environment.Trade Review"…offers insight into the IC manufacturing process…[to] the practicing engineer or interested professional." (IEEE Circuits & Devices Magazine, November/December 2006)Table of ContentsPreface. Acknowledgments. 1. Introduction to Semiconductor Manufacturing. Objectives. Introduction. 1.1. Historical Evolution. 1.2. Modern Semiconductor Manufacturing. 1.3. Goals of Manufacturing. 1.4. Manufacturing Systems. 1.5. Outline for Remainder of the Book. Summary. Problems. References. 2. Technology Overview. Objectives. Introduction. 2.1. Unit Processes. 2.2. Process Integration. Summary. Problems. References. 3. Process Monitoring. Objectives. Introduction. 3.1. Process Flow and Key Measurement Points. 3.2. Wafer State Measurements. 3.3. Equipment State Measurements. Summary. Problems. References. 4. Statistical Fundamentals. Objectives. Introduction. 4.1. Probability Distributions. 4.2. Sampling from a Normal Distribution. 4.3. Estimation 4.4. Hypothesis Testing. Summary. Problems. Reference. 5. Yield Modeling. Objectives. Introduction. 5.1. Definitions of Yield Components. 5.2. Functional Yield Models. 5.3. Functional Yield Model Components. 5.4. Parametric Yield. 5.5. Yield Simulation. 5.6. Design Centering. 5.7. Process Introduction and Time-to-Yield. Summary. Problems. References. 6. Statistical Process Control. Objectives. Introduction. 6.1. Control Chart Basics. 6.2. Patterns in Control Charts. 6.3. Control Charts for Attributes. 6.4. Control Charts for Variables. 6.5. Multivariate Control. 6.6. SPC with Correlated Process Data. Summary. Problems. References. 7. Statistical Experimental Design. Objectives. Introduction. 7.1. Comparing Distributions. 7.2. Analysis of Variance. 7.3. Factorial Designs. 7.4. Taguchi Method. Summary. Problems. References. 8. Process Modeling. Objectives. Introduction. 8.1. Regression Modeling. 8.2. Response Surface Methods. 8.3. Evolutionary Operation. 8.4. Principal-Component Analysis. 8.5. Intelligent Modeling Techniques. 8.6. Process Optimization. Summary. Problems. References. 9. Advanced Process Control. Objectives. Introduction. 9.1. Run-by-Run Control with Constant Term Adaptation. 9.2. Multivariate Control with Complete Model Adaptation. 9.3. Supervisory Control. Summary. Problems. References. 10. Process and Equipment Diagnosis. Objectives. Introduction. 10.1. Algorithmic Methods. 10.2. Expert Systems. 10.3. Neural Network Approaches. 10.4. Hybrid Methods. Summary. Problems. References. Appendix A: Some Properties of the Error Function. Appendix B: Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution. Appendix C: Percentage Points of the χ2 Distribution. Appendix D: Percentage Points of the t Distribution. Appendix E: Percentage Points of the F Distribution. Appendix F: Factors for Constructing Variables Control Charts. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn advanced treatment of the main concepts of radar. Systematic and organized, it nicely balances readability with mathematical rigor.Table of ContentsPartial table of contents: RADAR MEASUREMENTS. Delay and Range. Doppler Shift and Range Rate. CROSS SECTION OF RADAR TARGETS. Spheres. Radar Cross Section of Antennas. RADAR DETECTION. Integration. Binary Integration and Cumulative Probabilities. GROUND EFFECTS-MULTIPATH AND CLUTTER. The Rayleigh Criterion. Multipath Propagation. THE MATCHED FILTER. Example of a Matched Filter. Complex Representation of Bandpass Signals. THE AMBIGUITY FUNCTION. Proving Rules (a)-(d) of the Ambiguity Function. THE AMBIGUITY FUNCTION OF BASIC SIGNALS. Single-frequency Pulse. Coherent Pulse Train. CODED RADAR SIGNALS. Frequency coding (Costas Signals). Phase Coding. ACCURACY OF RADAR MEASUREMENTS. Delay Estimation Using the Signal Envelope. Measurement Accuracy and the Ambiguity Function. PROCESSING A COHERENT PULSE TRAIN. I & Q Sampling. Imbalance inthe I & Q Channels. MOVING-TARGET INDICATOR (MTI). Clutter Spectrum. Double Canceller. CONSTANT FALSE-ALARM RATE (CFAR). Cell-averaging CFAR. Cluttered Map CFAR. SYNTHETIC APERTURE RADAR (SAR). Phase and Frequency History of a Point Target. Range Migration. MONOPULSE ANTENNA TRACKING. Monopulse Systems. Monopulse Accuracy. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis text is unique in providing a broad overview of the latest aeronautical radio communication systems, as well as looking forward to future developments. The book is divided into three clear parts: Theory, System Level and Practicalities which covers the basic theory and physics governing aeronautical radio systems and networks.Table of ContentsPreface xvii Dedications xviii About the Author xviii Revisions, Corrections, Updates, Liability xix Book Layout and Structure xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 The Legacy 1 1.2 Today and the Second Generation of Equipment 1 1.3 The Future 3 1.4 Operational and User Changes 3 1.5 Radio Spectrum Used by Aviation 4 1.6 Discussion of the Organizational Structure of Aviation Communications Disciplines 6 2 Theory Governing Aeronautical Radio Systems 9 Summary 9 2.1 Basic Definitions 10 2.2 Propagation Fundamentals 11 2.3 Power, Amplitudes and the Decibel Scale 14 2.4 The Isotropic Power Source and Free Space Path Loss 15 2.5 Radio Geometry 19 2.6 Complex Propagation: Refraction, Absorption, Non-LOS Propagation 25 2.7 Other Propagation Effects 37 2.8 Modulation 38 2.9 Shannon’s Theory 62 2.10 Multiplexing and Trunking 62 2.11 Access Schemes 66 2.12 Mitigation Techniques for Fading and Multipath 71 2.13 Bandwidth Normalization 77 2.14 Antenna Gain 80 2.15 The Link Budget 87 2.16 Intermodulation 88 2.17 Noise in a Communication System 92 2.18 Satellite Theory 93 2.19 Availability and Reliability 99 Further Reading 104 3 VHF Communication 105 Summary 105 3.1 History 105 3.2 DSB-AM Transceiver at a System Level 110 3.3 Dimensioning a Mobile Communications System–The Three Cs 113 3.4 Regulatory and Licensing Aspects 123 3.5 VHF ‘Hardening’ and Intermodulation 125 3.6 The VHF Datalink 126 Further Reading 143 4 Military Communication Systems 145 Summary 145 4.1 Military VHF Communications – The Legacy 145 4.2 After the Legacy 146 4.3 The Shortfalls of the Military VHF Communication System 147 4.4 The Requirement for a New Tactical Military System 147 4.5 The Birth of JTIDS/MIDS 147 4.6 Technical Definitionof JTIDS and MIDS 148 5 Long-Distance Mobile Communications 157 Summary 157 5.1 High-Frequency Radio – The Legacy 157 5.2 Allocation and Allotment 158 5.3 HF System Features 158 5.4 HF Datalink System 162 5.5 Applications of Aeronautical HF 163 5.6 Mobile Satellite Communications 165 5.7 Comparison Between VHF, HF, L Band (JTIDS/MIDS) and Satellite Mobile Communications 175 5.8 Aeronautical Passenger Communications 175 Further Reading 175 6 Aeronautical Telemetry Systems 177 Summary 177 6.1 Introduction – The Legacy 177 6.2 Existing Systems 178 6.3 Productivity and Applications 182 6.4 Proposed Airbus Future Telemetry System 183 6.5 Unmanned Aerial Vehicles 185 7 Terrestrial Backhaul and the Aeronautical Telecommunications Network 187 Summary 187 7.1 Introduction 187 7.2 Types of Point-to-point Bearers 188 8 Future Aeronautical Mobile Communication Systems 201 Summary 201 8.1 Introduction 202 8.2 Near-term Certainties 202 8.3 Longer Term Options 210 Further Reading 219 9 The Economics of Radio 221 Summary 221 9.1 Introduction 221 9.2 Basic Rules of Economics 221 9.3 Analysis and the Break-even Point 222 9.4 The Cost of Money 222 9.5 The Safety Case 225 9.6 Reliability Cost 226 9.7 Macroeconomics 227 10 Ground Installations and Equipment 229 Summary 229 10.1 Introduction 229 10.2 Practical Equipment VHF Communication Band (118–137 MHz) 233 10.3 Outdoor 245 11 Avionics 259 Summary 259 11.1 Introduction 259 11.2 Environment 259 11.3 Types of Aircraft 268 11.4 Simple Avionics for Private Aviation 272 11.5 The Distributed Avionics Concept 273 11.6 Avionic Racking Arrangements 282 11.7 Avionic Boxes 284 11.8 Antennas 294 11.9 Mastering the Co-site Environment 301 11.10 Data Cables, Power Cables, Special Cables, Coaxial Cables 303 11.11 Certification and Maintaining Airworthiness 303 Further Reading 304 12 Interference, Electromagnetic Compatibility, Spectrum Management and Frequency Management 307 Summary 307 12.1 Introduction 308 12.2 Interference 308 12.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility 314 12.4 Spectrum Management Process 318 12.5 Frequency Management Process 322 Further Reading 324 Appendix 1 Summary of All Equations (Constants, Variables and Conversions) 325 Appendix 2 List of Symbols and Variables from Equations 333 Appendix 3 List of Constants 335 Appendix 4 Unit Conversions 337 Appendix 5 List of Abbreviations 339 Index 345

Read more less

Book SynopsisEssential project management forms aligned to the PMBOK GuideSixth Edition A Project Manager''s Book of Forms is an essential companion to the Project Management Institute''s A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge. Packed with ready-made forms for managing every stage in any project, this book offers both new and experienced project managers an invaluable resource for thorough documentation and repeatable processes. Endorsed by PMI and aligned with the PMBOK Guide, these forms cover all aspects of initiating, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, and closing; each form can be used as-is directly from the book, or downloaded from the companion website and tailored to your project''s unique needs. This new third edition has been updated to align with the newest PMBOK Guide, and includes forms for agile, the PMI Talent Triangle, technical project management, leadership, straTable of ContentsAcknowledgments vii Introduction ix New for this Edition ix Audience ix Organization x 1 Initiating Forms 1 1.0 Initiating Process Group 1 1.1 Project Charter 2 1.2 Assumption Log 9 1.3 Stakeholder Register 12 1.4 Stakeholder Analysis 15 2 Planning Forms 17 2.0 Planning Process Group 17 2.1 Project Management Plan 20 2.2 Change Management Plan 25 2.3 Project Roadmap 28 2.4 Scope Management Plan 30 2.5 Requirements Management Plan 33 2.6 Requirements Documentation 37 2.7 Requirements Traceability Matrix 40 2.8 Project Scope Statement 45 2.9 Work Breakdown Structure 49 2.10 WBS Dictionary 52 2.11 Schedule Management Plan 56 2.12 Activity List 59 2.13 Activity Attributes 62 2.14 Milestone List 65 2.15 Network Diagram 67 2.16 Duration Estimates 70 2.17 Duration Estimating Worksheet 73 2.18 Project Schedule 78 2.19 Cost Management Plan 82 2.20 Cost Estimates 85 2.21 Cost Estimating Worksheet 88 2.22 Cost Baseline 93 2.23 Quality Management Plan 95 2.24 Quality Metrics 99 2.25 Responsibility Assignment Matrix 101 2.26 Resource Management Plan 104 2.27 Team Charter 109 2.28 Resource Requirements 113 2.29 Resource Breakdown Structure 116 2.30 Communications Management Plan 118 2.31 Risk Management Plan 121 2.32 Risk Register 128 2.33 Risk Report 131 2.34 Probability and Impact Assessment 137 2.35 Probability and Impact Matrix 142 2.36 Risk Data Sheet 144 2.37 Procurement Management Plan 147 2.38 Procurement Strategy 152 2.39 Source Selection Criteria 155 2.40 Stakeholder Engagement Plan 158 3 Executing Forms 163 3.0 Executing Process Group 163 3.1 Issue Log 165 3.2 Decision Log 168 3.3 Change Request 170 3.4 Change Log 175 3.5 Lessons Learned Register 178 3.6 Quality Audit 181 3.7 Team Performance Assessment 184 4 Monitoring and Controlling Forms 189 4.0 Monitoring and Controlling Process Group 189 4.1 Team Member Status Report 191 4.2 Project Status Report 196 4.3 Variance Analysis 202 4.4 Earned Value Analysis 206 4.5 Risk Audit 209 4.6 Contractor Status Report 213 4.7 Procurement Audit 218 4.8 Contract Closeout Report 222 4.9 Product Acceptance Form 226 5 Closing 229 5.0 Closing Process Group 229 5.1 Lessons Learned Summary 229 5.2 Project or Phase Closeout 235 6 Agile 239 6.1 Product Vision 240 6.2 Product Backlog 242 6.3 Release Plan 244 6.4 Retrospective 246 Index 249

Read more less

Book SynopsisPublisher's Note: Products purchased from Third Party sellers are not guaranteed by the publisher for quality, authenticity, or access to any online entitlements included with the product.Up-to-date coverage of every facet of electric power in a single volumeThis fully revised, industry-standard resource offers practical details on every aspect of electric power engineering. The book contains in-depth discussions from more than 100 internationally recognized experts. Generation, transmission, distribution, operation, system protection, and switchgear are thoroughly explained. Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers, Seventeenth Edition, features brand-new sections on measurement and instrumentation, interconnected power grids, smart grids and

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe second edition of the text that offers an introduction to the principles of solar cells and LEDs, revised and updated The revised and updated second edition of Principles of Solar Cells, LEDs and Related Devices offers an introduction to the physical concepts required for a comprehensive understanding of p-n junction devices, light emitting diodes and solar cells. The author a noted expert in the field presents information on the semiconductor and junction device fundamentals and extends it to the practical implementation of semiconductors in both photovoltaic and LED devices. In addition, the text offers information on the treatment of a range of important semiconductor materials and device structures including OLED devices and organic solar cells. This second edition contains a new chapter on the quantum mechanical description of the electron that will make the book accessible to students in any engineering discipline. The text also includes a neTable of ContentsIntroduction xi Acknowledgements xv 1 Introduction to Quantum Mechanics 1 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 The Classical Electron 2 1.3 Two Slit Electron Experiment 4 1.4 The Photoelectric Effect 7 1.5 Wave Packets and Uncertainty 10 1.6 The Wavefunction 12 1.7 The Schrödinger Equation 14 1.8 The Electron in a One-Dimensional Well 18 1.9 Electron Transmission and Reflection at Potential Energy Step 24 1.10 Expectation Values 26 1.11 Spin 26 1.12 The Pauli Exclusion Principle 29 1.13 Summary 30 Further Reading 32 Problems 33 2 Semiconductor Physics 37 2.1 Introduction 38 2.2 The Band Theory of Solids 38 2.3 Bloch Functions 40 2.4 The Kronig–Penney Model 42 2.5 The Bragg Model 47 2.6 Effective Mass 48 2.7 Number of States in a Band 50 2.8 Band Filling 52 2.9 Fermi Energy and Holes 53 2.10 Carrier Concentration 55 2.11 Semiconductor Materials 65 2.12 Semiconductor Band Diagrams 67 2.13 Direct Gap and Indirect Gap Semiconductors 72 2.14 Extrinsic Semiconductors 74 2.15 Carrier Transport in Semiconductors 79 2.16 Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Dynamics 83 2.17 Carrier Diffusion and the Einstein Relation 86 2.18 Quasi-Fermi Energies 88 2.19 The Diffusion Equation 91 2.20 Traps and Carrier Lifetimes 94 2.21 Alloy Semiconductors 98 2.22 Summary 100 References 103 Further Reading 103 Problems 105 3 The p–n Junction Diode 111 3.1 Introduction 112 3.2 Diode Current 113 3.3 Contact Potential 117 3.4 The Depletion Approximation 119 3.5 The Diode Equation 127 3.6 Reverse Breakdown and the Zener Diode 139 3.7 Tunnel Diodes 141 3.8 Generation/Recombination Currents 143 3.9 Metal–Semiconductor Junctions 145 3.10 Heterojunctions 156 3.11 Alternating Current (AC) and Transient Behaviour 157 3.12 Summary 159 Further Reading 160 Problems 161 4 Photon Emission and Absorption 165 4.1 Introduction to Luminescence and Absorption 166 4.2 Physics of Light Emission 167 4.3 Simple Harmonic Radiator 169 4.4 Quantum Description 170 4.5 The Exciton 174 4.6 Two-Electron Atoms 176 4.7 Molecular Excitons 184 4.8 Band-to-Band Transitions 186 4.9 Photometric Units 190 4.10 Summary 194 References 195 Further Reading 195 Problems 197 5 p–n Junction Solar Cells 201 5.1 Introduction 202 5.2 Light Absorption 204 5.3 Solar Radiation 207 5.4 Solar Cell Design and Analysis 207 5.5 Thin Solar Cells, G = 0 214 5.6 Thin Solar Cells, G > 0 218 5.7 Solar Cell Generation as a Function of Depth 220 5.8 Surface Recombination Reduction 224 5.9 Solar Cell Efficiency 225 5.10 Silicon Solar Cell Technology: Wafer Preparation 230 5.11 Silicon Solar Cell Technology: Solar Cell Finishing 233 5.12 Silicon Solar Cell Technology: Advanced Production Methods 237 5.13 Thin-Film Solar Cells: Amorphous Silicon 238 5.14 Telluride/Selenide/Sulphide Thin-Film Solar Cells 245 5.15 High-efficiency Multi-junction Solar Cells 247 5.16 Concentrating Solar Systems 251 5.17 Summary 253 References 254 Further Reading 255 Problems 257 6 Light-Emitting Diodes 265 6.1 Introduction 266 6.2 LED Operation and Device Structures 267 6.3 Emission Spectrum 269 6.4 Non-radiative Recombination 271 6.5 Optical Outcoupling 272 6.6 GaAs LEDs 275 6.7 GaAs1−x Px LEDs 277 6.8 Double Heterojunction Alx Ga1−x As LEDs 278 6.9 AlGaInP LEDs 285 6.10 Ga1−xInxN LEDs 286 6.11 LED Structures for Enhanced Outcoupling and High Lumen Output 294 6.12 Summary 299 References 300 Further Reading 301 Problems 303 7 Organic Semiconductors, OLEDs, and Solar Cells 307 7.1 Introduction to Organic Electronics 308 7.2 Conjugated Systems 309 7.3 Polymer OLEDs 314 7.4 Small-Molecule OLEDs 320 7.5 Anode Materials 323 7.6 Cathode Materials 324 7.7 Hole Injection Layer 325 7.8 Electron Injection Layer 326 7.9 Hole Transport Layer 326 7.10 Electron Transport Layer 328 7.11 Light-Emitting Material Processes 330 7.12 Host Materials 332 7.13 Fluorescent Dopants 334 7.14 Phosphorescent and Thermally Activated Delayed Fluorescence Dopants 335 7.15 Organic Solar Cells 340 7.16 Organic Solar Cell Materials 344 7.17 Summary 349 References 352 Further Reading 352 Problems 353 8 Junction Transistors 359 8.1 Introduction 359 8.2 Bipolar Junction Transistor 360 8.3 Junction Field-Effect Transistor 367 8.4 BJT and JFET Symbols and Applications 371 8.5 Summary 372 Further Reading 373 Problems 375 Appendix 1: Physical Constants 377 Appendix 2: Derivation of the Uncertainty Principle 379 Appendix 3: Derivation of Group Velocity 383 Appendix 4: The Boltzmann Distribution Function 385 Appendix 5: Properties of Semiconductor Materials 391 Index 392

Read more less

Book SynopsisDo you need to understand feedback? Perhaps you''re a little rusty on theory basics? Dig in to this self-contained guide for an accessible and concise explanation of the fundamentals. Distills the relevant essence of linear system theory, calculus, differential equations, linear algebra, basic physics, numerical methods, and complex analysis, and links them back to an explanation of feedback theory. Provides a tight synthesis of analytical and conceptual understanding. Maintains a focus on common use cases. Whether you are a struggling undergraduate, a doctoral student preparing for your qualifying exams, or an industry practitioner, this easy-to-understand book invites you to relax, enjoy the material, and follow your curiosity.Trade Review'Feedback theory is an intrinsically mathematical discipline in which one can feel either submerged by formulae or driven to use blind computer simulations that hide insight. Dawson's approach is to extract visceral meaning out of this tangle, arguing that a deep understanding of dynamic stability criteria can free the designer from 'equational overload' and lead to incisive selection of the right mathematical tool for the job at hand.' Stephen D. Senturia, Massachusetts Institute of Technology'Feedback is perhaps the most foundational concept for electronics and control systems in general, but it is often covered for specific circuits for the former, and in terms of theoretical concepts for the latter. This book provides us with a unique perspective of how feedback theory in general relates to practical systems and electronics applications.' Larry Pileggi, Carnegie Mellon University'Recommended.' D. Z. Spicer, Choice MagazineTable of ContentsPreface; 1. Linear Systems: What You Missed the First Time; 2. The Basics of Feedback; 3. The Nyquist Stability Criterion; 4. Some Common Loose Ends; 5. Feedback in the Real World; 6. Conclusion and Further Reading; Notes; Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a comprehensive introduction to the design and analysis of unmanned aircraft systems with a systems perspective Written for students and engineers who are new to the field of unmanned aerial vehicle design, this book teaches the many UAV design techniques being used today and demonstrates how to apply aeronautical science concepts to their design. Design of Unmanned Aerial Systems covers the design of UAVs in three sectionsvehicle design, autopilot design, and ground systems designin a way that allows readers to fully comprehend the science behind the subject so that they can then demonstrate creativity in the application of these concepts on their own. It teaches students and engineers all about: UAV classifications, design groups, design requirements, mission planning, conceptual design, detail design, and design procedures. It provides them with in-depth knowledge of ground stations, power systems, propulsion systems, automatic flight control systems, guidance systems, naviTable of ContentsPreface xix Acronyms xxv Nomenclature xxix About the Companion Website xxxvii 1 Design Fundamentals 1 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 UAV Classifications 5 1.3 Review of a Few Successful UAVs 8 1.4 Design Project Planning 12 1.5 Decision Making 13 1.6 Design Criteria, Objectives, and Priorities 15 1.7 Feasibility Analysis 17 1.8 Design Groups 17 1.9 Design Process 18 1.10 Systems Engineering Approach 19 1.11 UAV Conceptual Design 21 1.12 UAV Preliminary Design 27 1.13 UAV Detail Design 28 1.14 Design Review, Evaluation, Feedback 30 1.15 UAV Design Steps 30 Questions 32 2 Preliminary Design 35 2.1 Introduction 35 2.2 Maximum Takeoff Weight Estimation 36 2.3 Weight Buildup 36 2.4 Payload Weight 37 2.5 Autopilot Weight 37 2.6 Fuel Weight 39 2.7 Battery Weight 43 2.8 Empty Weight 47 2.9 Wing and Engine Sizing 48 2.10 Quadcopter Configuration 52 Questions 60 Problems 61 3 Design Disciplines 65 3.1 Introduction 66 3.2 Aerodynamic Design 67 3.3 Structural Design 69 3.4 Propulsion System Design 71 3.5 Landing Gear Design 75 3.6 Mechanical and Power Transmission Systems Design 78 3.7 Electric Systems 80 3.8 Control Surfaces Design 85 3.9 Safety Analysis 90 3.10 Installation Guidelines 95 Questions 96 Design Questions 97 Problems 99 4 Aerodynamic Design 101 4.1 Introduction 102 4.2 Fundamentals of Aerodynamics 103 4.3 Wing Design 104 4.4 Tail Design 113 4.5 Vertical Tail Design 119 4.6 Fuselage Design 123 4.7 Antenna 130 4.8 Aerodynamic Design of Quadcopters 132 4.9 Aerodynamic Design Guidelines 133 Questions 134 Problems 136 5 Fundamentals of Autopilot Design 141 5.1 Introduction 142 5.2 Dynamic Modeling 146 5.3 Aerodynamic Forces and Moments 153 5.4 Simplification Techniques of Dynamic Models 157 5.5 Fixed‐Wing UAV Dynamic Models 161 5.6 Dynamic Model Approximation 169 5.7 Quadcopter (Rotary‐Wing) Dynamic Model 170 5.8 Autopilot Categories 176 5.9 Flight Simulation – Numerical Methods 181 5.10 Flying Qualities for UAVs 185 5.11 Autopilot Design Process 187 Questions 188 Problems 190 6 Control System Design 195 6.1 Introduction 196 6.2 Fundamentals of Control Systems 197 6.3 Servo/Actuator 203 6.4 Flight Control Requirements 207 6.5 Control Modes 209 6.6 Controller Design 223 6.7 Autonomy 234 6.8 Manned–Unmanned Aircraft Teaming 237 6.9 Control System Design Process 243 Questions 246 Problems 249 7 Guidance System Design 255 7.1 Introduction 256 7.2 Fundamentals 257 7.3 Guidance Laws 263 7.4 Command Guidance Law 265 7.5 PN Guidance Law 269 7.6 Pursuit Guidance Law 273 7.7 Waypoint Guidance Law 274 7.8 Sense and Avoid 282 7.9 Formation Flight 291 7.10 Motion Planning and Trajectory Design 293 7.11 Guidance Sensor – Seeker 294 7.12 Guidance System Design 296 Questions 298 Problems 300 8 Navigation System Design 305 8.1 Introduction 306 8.2 Classifications 307 8.3 Coordinate Systems 309 8.4 Inertial Navigation System 311 8.5 Kalman Filtering 315 8.6 Global Positioning System 317 8.7 Position Fixing Navigation 322 8.8 Navigation in Reduced Visibility Conditions 323 8.9 Inertial Navigation Sensors 323 8.10 Navigation Disturbances 335 8.11 Navigation System Design 345 Questions 348 Problems 351 9 Microcontroller 355 9.1 Introduction 356 9.2 Basic Fundamentals 358 9.3 Microcontroller Circuitry 367 9.4 Embedded Systems 369 9.5 Microcontroller Programming 371 9.6 Programming in C 374 9.7 Arduino 378 9.8 Open‐Source Commercial Autopilots 384 9.9 Design Procedure 387 9.10 Design Project 388 Questions 393 Problems 395 Design Projects 397 10 Launch and Recovery Systems Design 399 10.1 Introduction 400 10.2 Launch Technologies and Techniques 402 10.3 Launcher Equipment 410 10.4 Fundamentals of Launch 415 10.5 Elevation Mechanism Design 422 10.6 VTOL 424 10.7 Recovery Technologies and Techniques 424 10.8 Recovery Fundamentals 429 10.9 Launch/Recovery Systems Mobility 431 10.10 Launch and Recovery Systems Design 433 Questions 437 Problems 440 Design Projects 443 11 Ground Control Station 445 11.1 Introduction 446 11.2 GCS Subsystems 448 11.3 Types of Ground Stations 448 11.4 GCS of a Number of UAVs 460 11.5 Human‐Related Design Requirements 464 11.6 Support Equipment 469 11.7 GCS Design Guidelines 472 Questions 473 Problems 475 Design Problems 476 Laboratory Experiments 477 12 Payloads Selection/Design 481 12.1 Introduction 482 12.2 Elements of Payload 483 12.3 Payloads of a Few UAVs 484 12.4 Cargo or Freight Payload 487 12.5 Reconnaissance/Surveillance Payload 488 12.6 Scientific Payloads 505 12.7 Military Payloads 508 12.8 Electronic Counter Measure Payloads 509 12.9 Payload Installation 511 12.10 Payload Control and Management 520 12.11 Payload Selection/Design Guidelines 520 Questions 523 Problems 525 Design Problems 527 13 Communications System Design 531 13.1 Fundamentals 532 13.2 Data Link 534 13.3 Transmitter 536 13.4 Receiver 537 13.5 Antenna 539 13.6 Radio Frequency 541 13.7 Encryption 544 13.8 Communications Systems of a Few UAVs 545 13.9 Installation 547 13.10 Communications System Design 547 13.11 Bi‐directional Communications Using Arduino Boards 548 Questions 558 Problems 560 Laboratory Experiments 561 Design Projects 562 14 Design Analysis and Feedbacks 565 14.1 Introduction 566 14.2 Design Feedbacks 567 14.3 Weight and Balance 569 14.4 Stability Analysis 573 14.5 Controllability Analysis 579 14.6 Flight Performance Analysis 582 14.7 Cost Analysis 591 Questions 593 Problems 595 References 601 Index 609

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Updated Third Edition Provides a Systems Approach to Sustainable Green Energy Production and Contains Analytical Tools for the Design of Renewable Microgrids The revised third edition ofDesign of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systemsintegrates three areas of electrical engineering: power systems, power electronics, and electric energy conversion systems. The book also addresses the fundamental design of wind and photovoltaic (PV) energy microgrids as part of smart-bulk power-grid systems. In order to demystify the complexity of the integrated approach, the author first presents the basic concepts, and then explores a simulation test bed in MATLAB in order to use these concepts to solve a basic problem in the development of smart grid energy system. Each chapter offers a problem of integration and describes why it is important. Then the mathematical model of the problem is formulated, and the solution steps are outlined. This step is followed by deTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xvi About the Companion Website xvii 1 Energy and Civilization 1 1.1 Introduction: Motivation 1 1.2 Fossil Fuel 2 1.3 Energy Use and Industrialization 2 1.4 Nuclear Energy 4 1.5 Global Warming 5 1.6 The Age of the Electric Power Grid 9 1.7 Green and Renewable Energy Sources 10 1.8 Hydrogen 11 1.9 Solar and Photovoltaic 11 1.9.1 Wind Power 12 1.9.2 Geothermal 13 1.10 Biomass 13 1.11 Ethanol 13 1.12 Energy Units and Conversions 13 1.13 Estimating the Cost of Energy 17 1.14 New Oil Boom–Hydraulic Fracturing (Fracking) 20 1.15 Estimation of Future CO2 21 1.16 The Paris Agreement | UNFCCC 22 1.17 Energy Utilization and Economic Growth 23 1.18 Conclusion 23 Problems 24 Further Reading 26 2 Power Grids 28 2.1 Introduction 28 2.2 Electric Power Grids 29 2.2.1 Background 29 2.2.2 The Construction of a Power Grid System 29 2.3 Basic Concepts of Power Grids 33 2.3.1 Common Terms 33 2.3.2 Calculating Power Consumption 33 2.4 Load Models 49 2.5 Transformers in Electric Power Grids 53 2.5.1 A Short History of Transformers 54 2.5.2 Transmission Voltage 54 2.5.3 Transformers 55 2.6 Modeling a Microgrid System 59 2.6.1 The Per Unit System 60 2.7 Modeling Three-Phase Transformers 69 2.8 Tap-Changing Transformers 72 2.9 Modeling Transmission Lines 74 Problems 87 References 92 3 Modeling of Converters in Power Grid Distributed Generation Systems 93 3.1 Introduction 93 3.2 Single-Phase DC/AC Inverters with Two Switches 94 3.3 Single-Phase DC/AC Inverters with a Four-Switch Bipolar Switching Method 106 3.3.1 Pulse Width Modulation with Unipolar Voltage Switching for a Single-Phase Full-Bridge Inverter 110 3.4 Three-Phase DC/AC Inverters 113 3.5 Pulse Width Modulation Methods 114 3.5.1 The Triangular Method 114 3.5.2 The Identity Method 119 3.6 Analysis of DC/AC Three-Phase Inverters 120 3.7 Microgrid of Renewable Energy Systems 130 3.8 DC/DC Converters in Green Energy Systems 133 3.8.1 The Step-Up Converter 134 3.8.2 The Step-Down Converter 144 3.8.3 The Buck–Boost Converter 151 3.9 Rectifiers 156 3.10 Pulse Width Modulation Rectifiers 160 3.11 A Three-Phase Voltage Source Rectifier Utilizing Sinusoidal PWM Switching 163 3.12 The Sizing of an Inverter for Microgrid Operation 167 3.13 The Sizing of a Rectifier for Microgrid Operation 169 3.14 The Sizing of DC/DC Converters for Microgrid Operation 170 Problems 171 References 176 4 Smart Power Grid Systems 177 4.1 Introduction 177 4.2 Power Grid Operation 178 4.3 Vertically and Market-Structured Power Grid 184 4.4 The Operations Control of a Power Grid 187 4.5 Load Frequency Control 187 4.6 Automatic Generation Control 193 4.7 Operating Reserve Calculation 198 4.8 Basic Concepts of a Smart Power Grid 199 4.9 The Load Factor 206 4.10 The Load Factor and Real-Time Pricing 209 4.11 A Cyber-Controlled Smart Grid 212 4.12 Smart Grid Development 214 4.13 Smart Microgrid Renewable and Green Energy Systems 216 4.14 A Power Grid Steam Generator 223 4.15 Power Grid Modeling 234 Problems 240 References 245 5 Solar Energy Systems 247 5.1 Introduction 247 5.2 The Solar Energy Conversion Process: Thermal Power Plants 251 5.3 Photovoltaic Power Conversion 253 5.4 Photovoltaic Materials 253 5.5 Photovoltaic Characteristics 255 5.6 Photovoltaic Efficiency 258 5.7 The Design of Photovoltaic Systems 262 5.8 The Modeling of a Photovoltaic Module 277 5.9 The Measurement of Photovoltaic Performance 278 5.10 The Maximum Power Point of a Photovoltaic Array 278 5.11 A Battery Storage System 292 5.12 A Storage System Based on a Single-Cell Battery 294 5.13 The Energy Yield of a Photovoltaic Module and the Angle of Incidence 317 5.14 The State of Photovoltaic Generation Technology 318 Problems 318 References 326 6 Microgrid Wind Energy Systems 328 6.1 Introduction 328 6.2 Wind Power 329 6.3 Wind Turbine Generators 331 6.4 The Modeling of Induction Machines 334 6.4.1 Calculation of Slip 343 6.4.2 The Equivalent Circuit of an Induction Machine 343 6.5 Power Flow Analysis of an Induction Machine 346 6.6 The Operation of an Induction Generator 351 6.7 Dynamic Performance 366 6.8 The Doubly Fed Induction Generator 372 6.9 Brushless Doubly Fed Induction Generator Systems 375 6.10 Variable-Speed Permanent Magnet Generators 376 6.11 A Variable-Speed Synchronous Generator 377 6.12 A Variable-Speed Generator with a Converter Isolated from the Grid 378 Problems 380 References 384 7 Load Flow Analysis of Power Grids and Microgrids 386 7.1 Introduction 386 7.2 Voltage Calculation in Power Grid Analysis 387 7.3 The Power Flow Problem 391 7.4 Load Flow Study as a Power System Engineering Tool 392 7.5 Bus Types 392 7.6 General Formulation of the Power Flow Problem 397 7.7 Algorithm for Calculation of Bus Admittance Model 400 7.7.1 The History of Algebra, Algorithm, and Number Systems 400 7.7.2 Bus Admittance Algorithm 402 7.8 The Bus Impedance Algorithm 403 7.9 Formulation of the Load Flow Problem 404 7.10 The Gauss–Seidel YBUS Algorithm 407 7.11 The Gauss–Seidel ZBUS Algorithm 412 7.12 Comparison of the YBUS and ZBUS Power Flow Solution Methods 419 7.13 The Synchronous and Asynchronous Operation of Microgrids 420 7.14 An Advanced Power Flow Solution Method: The Newton–Raphson Algorithm 422 7.14.1 The Newton–Raphson Algorithm 425 7.15 General Formulation of the Newton–Raphson Algorithm 430 7.16 The Decoupled Newton–Raphson Algorithm 434 7.17 The Fast Decoupled Load Flow Algorithm 435 7.18 Analysis of a Power Flow Problem 436 Problems 448 References 461 8 Power Grid and Microgrid Fault Studies 462 8.1 Introduction 462 8.2 Power Grid Fault Current Calculation 464 8.3 Symmetrical Components 468 8.4 Sequence Networks for Power Generators 473 8.5 The Modeling of Wind and PV Generating Stations 476 8.6 Sequence Networks for Balanced Three-Phase Transmission Lines 477 8.7 Ground Current Flow in Balanced Three-Phase Transformers 479 8.8 Zero Sequence Network 481 8.8.1 Transformers 481 8.8.2 Load Connections 482 8.8.3 Power Grid 484 8.9 Fault Studies 487 8.9.1 Balanced Three-Phase Fault Analysis 490 8.9.2 Unbalanced Faults 508 8.9.3 Single-Line-to-Ground Faults 508 8.9.4 Double-Line-to-Ground Faults 511 8.9.5 Line-to-Line Faults 513 Problems 527 References 533 9 Smart Devices and Energy Efficiency Monitoring Systems 534 9.1 Introduction 534 9.2 Kilowatt-Hour Measurements 535 9.3 Current and Voltage Measurements 536 9.4 Power Measurements at 60 or 50HZ 537 9.5 Analog-to-Digital Conversions 538 9.6 Root Mean Square (RMS) Measurement Devices 538 9.7 Energy Monitoring Systems 539 9.8 Smart Meters 539 9.9 Power Monitoring and Scheduling 540 9.10 Communication Systems 541 9.11 Network Security and Software 543 9.12 Smartphone Applications 546 9.13 Summary 546 Problems 547 Further Reading 548 10 Load Estimation and Classification 549 10.1 Introduction 549 10.2 Load Estimation of a Residential Load 549 10.3 Service Feeder and Metering 557 10.3.1 Assumed Wattages 557 Problems 560 References 562 11 Energy Saving and Cost Estimation of Incandescent and Light-Emitting Diodes 563 11.1 Building Lighting with Incandescent Bulbs 563 11.2 Comparative Performance of LED, Incandescent, and LFC Lighting 564 11.3 Building Load Estimation 566 11.4 Led Energy Saving 569 11.5 Return on Investment on LED Lighting 571 11.6 Annual Carbon Emissions 572 Problems 572 References 572 Appendix A Complex Numbers 573 Appendix B Transmission Line and Distribution Typical Data 576 Appendix C Energy Yield of Photovoltaic Panels and Angle of Incidence 581 Appendix D Wind Power 594 Index 599

Read more less

Book SynopsisReliability Analysis Using MINITAB and Python Complete overview of the theory and fundamentals of Reliability Analysis applied with Minitab and Python tools Reliability Analysis Using Minitab and Python expertly applies Minitab and Python programs to the field of reliability engineering, presenting basic concepts and explaining step-by-step how to implement statistical distributions and reliability analysis methods using the two programming languages. The textbook enables readers to effectively use software to efficiently process massive amounts of data while also reducing human error. Examples and case studies as well as exercises and questions are included throughout to enable a smooth learning experience. Excel files containing the sample data and Minitab and Python example files are also provided. Students who have basic knowledge of probability and statistics will find this textbook highly approachable. Nonetheless, it also covers material on basic statistics at the beginning, soTable of ContentsAbout the Author ix Preface xi Acknowledgments xiii About the Companion Website xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Reliability Concepts 1 1.1.1 Reliability in Our Lives 1 1.1.2 History of Reliability 2 1.1.3 Definition of Reliability 2 1.1.4 Quality and Reliability 3 1.1.5 The Importance of Reliability 4 1.2 Failure Concepts 5 1.2.1 Definition of Failure 5 1.2.2 Causes of Failure 5 1.2.3 Types of Failure Time 7 1.2.4 The Reliability Bathtub Curve 12 1.3 Summary 16 2 Basic Concepts of Probability 19 2.1 Probability 19 2.1.1 The Importance of Probability in Reliability 20 2.2 Joint Probability with Independence 20 2.3 Union Probability 21 2.4 Conditional Probability 22 2.5 Joint Probability with Dependence 22 2.6 Mutually Exclusive Events 23 2.7 Complement Rule 24 2.8 Total Probability 24 2.9 Bayes’ Rule 25 2.10 Summary 26 3 Lifetime Distributions 29 3.1 Probability Distributions 29 3.1.1 Random Variables 29 3.2 Discrete Probability Distribution 30 3.3 Continuous Probability Distribution 32 3.3.1 Reliability Concepts 33 3.3.2 Failure Rate 35 3.4 Exponential Distribution 37 3.4.1 Exponential Lack of Memory Property 40 3.4.2 Excel Practice 41 3.4.3 Minitab Practice 41 3.4.4 Python Practice 43 3.5 Weibull Distribution 46 3.5.1 Excel Practice 52 3.5.2 Minitab Practice 52 3.5.3 Python Practice 53 3.6 Normal Distribution 54 3.6.1 Excel Practice 60 3.6.2 Minitab Practice 60 3.6.3 Python Practice 62 3.7 Lognormal Distribution 63 3.7.1 Excel Practice 66 3.7.2 Minitab Practice 66 3.7.3 Python Practice 68 3.8 Summary 70 4 Reliability Data Plotting 77 4.1 Straight Line Properties 77 4.2 Least Squares Fit 79 4.2.1 Excel Practice 81 4.2.2 Minitab Practice 82 4.2.3 Python Practice 82 4.3 Linear Rectification 84 4.4 Exponential Distribution Plotting 84 4.4.1 Excel Practice 92 4.4.2 Minitab Practice 92 4.4.3 Python Practice 94 4.5 Weibull Distribution Plotting 96 4.5.1 Minitab Practice 99 4.5.2 Python Practice 100 4.6 Normal Distribution Plotting 103 4.6.1 Minitab Practice 105 4.6.2 Python Practice 105 4.7 Lognormal Distribution Plotting 106 4.7.1 Minitab Practice 108 4.7.2 Python Practice 110 4.8 Summary 111 5 Accelerated Life Testing 115 5.1 Accelerated Testing Theory 115 5.2 Exponential Distribution Acceleration 117 5.3 Weibull Distribution Acceleration 118 5.3.1 Minitab Practice 119 5.3.2 Python Practice 120 5.4 Arrhenius Model 123 5.4.1 Minitab Practice 125 5.4.2 Python Practice 127 5.5 Summary 129 6 System Failure Modeling 131 6.1 Reliability Block Diagram 131 6.2 Series System Model 132 6.3 Parallel System Model 135 6.4 Combined Serial–Parallel System Model 138 6.5 k-out-of-n System Model 140 6.6 Minimal Paths and Minimal Cuts 142 6.7 Summary 148 7 Repairable Systems 151 7.1 Corrective Maintenance 151 7.2 Preventive Maintenance 152 7.3 Mean Time between Failures 152 7.4 Mean Time to Repair 153 7.5 Availability 153 7.5.1 Inherent Availability 153 7.5.2 Achieved Availability 154 7.5.3 Operational Availability 155 7.5.4 System Availability 156 7.6 Maintainability 156 7.7 Preventive Maintenance Scheduling 157 7.7.1 Python Practice 160 7.8 Summary 161 8 Case Studies 165 8.1 Parametric Reliability Analysis 165 8.1.1 Description of Case Study 166 8.1.2 Minitab Practice 166 8.1.3 Python Practice 177 8.2 Nonparametric Reliability Analysis 184 8.2.1 Description of Case Study 184 8.2.2 Minitab Practice 185 8.2.3 Python Practice 189 8.3 Driverless Car Failure Data Analysis 190 8.3.1 Description of Case Study 190 8.3.2 Minitab Practice 193 8.3.3 Python Practice 199 8.4 Warranty Analysis 202 8.4.1 Description of Case Study 202 8.4.2 Minitab Practice 204 8.5 Stress–Strength Interference Analysis 210 8.5.1 Description of Case Study 210 8.5.2 Minitab Practice 211 8.5.3 Python Practice 213 8.6 Summary 214 Index 219

Read more less

Book SynopsisFundamentals of Electric Propulsion Understand the fundamental basis of spaceflight with this cutting-edge guide As spacecraft engineering continues to advance, so too do the propulsion methods by which human beings can seek out the stars. Ion thrusters and Hall thrusters have been the subject of considerable innovation in recent years, and spacecraft propulsion has never been more efficient. For professionals within and adjacent to spacecraft engineering, this is critical knowledge that can alter the future of space flight. Fundamentals of Electric Propulsion offers a thorough grounding in electric propulsion for spacecraft, particularly the features and mechanisms underlying Ion and Hall thrusters. Updated in the light of rapidly expanding knowledge, the second edition of this essential guide detailed coverage of thruster principles, plasma physics, and more. It reflects the historic output of the legendary Jet Propulsion Laboratory and promises to contiTable of ContentsNote from the Series Editor xi Foreword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Electric Propulsion Background 2 1.2 Electric Thruster Types 3 1.2.1 Resistojet 3 1.2.2 Arcjet 4 1.2.3 Electrospray/FEEP Thruster 4 1.2.4 Ion Thruster 4 1.2.5 Hall Thruster 4 1.2.6 Magnetoplasmadynamic (MPD) Thruster 4 1.2.7 Pulsed Plasma Thruster (PPT) 5 1.2.8 Pulsed Inductive Thruster (PIT) 5 1.3 Electrostatic Thrusters 6 1.3.1 Ion Thrusters 6 1.3.2 Hall Thrusters 7 1.4 Electromagnetic Thrusters 7 1.4.1 Magnetoplasmadynamic Thrusters 8 1.4.2 Pulsed Plasma Thrusters 9 1.4.3 Pulsed Inductive Thrusters 9 1.5 Beam/Plume Characteristics 11 References 12 2 Thruster Principles 15 2.1 The Rocket Equation 15 2.2 Force Transfer in Electric Thrusters 17 2.2.1 Ion Thrusters 17 2.2.2 Hall Thrusters 18 2.2.3 Electromagnetic Thrusters 19 2.3 Thrust 20 2.4 Specific Impulse 23 2.5 Thruster Efficiency 25 2.6 Power Dissipation 27 2.7 Neutral Densities and Ingestion 29 Problems 30 References 31 3 Basic Plasma Physics 33 3.1 Introduction 33 3.2 Maxwell’s Equations 33 3.3 Single Particle Motions 34 3.4 Particle Energies and Velocities 37 3.5 Plasma as a Fluid 39 3.5.1 Momentum Conservation 39 3.5.2 Particle Conservation 41 3.5.3 Energy Conservation 43 3.6 Diffusion in Partially Ionized Plasma 45 3.6.1 Collisions 46 3.6.2 Diffusion and Mobility Without a Magnetic Field 49 3.6.2.1 Fick’s Law and the Diffusion Equation 50 3.6.2.2 Ambipolar Diffusion Without a Magnetic Field 53 3.6.3 Diffusion Across Magnetic Fields 54 3.6.3.1 Classical Diffusion of Particles across B Fields 54 3.6.3.2 Ambipolar Diffusion Across B Fields 56 3.7 Sheaths at the Boundaries of Plasmas 57 3.7.1 Debye Sheaths 58 3.7.2 Pre-sheaths 60 3.7.3 Child-Langmuir Sheath 62 3.7.4 Generalized Sheath Solution 63 3.7.5 Double Sheaths 65 3.7.6 Summary of Sheath Effects 67 Problems 69 References 70 4 Hollow Cathodes 71 4.1 Introduction 71 4.2 Cathode Configurations 76 4.3 Thermionic Electron Emitters 80 4.4 Insert Region 85 4.5 Orifice Region 100 4.6 Cathode Plume Region 110 4.7 Heating and Thermal Models 117 4.7.1 Hollow Cathode Heaters 117 4.7.2 Heaterless Hollow Cathodes 118 4.7.3 Hollow Cathode Thermal Models 120 4.8 Hollow Cathode Life 122 4.8.1 Dispenser Cathode Insert-Region Plasmas 122 4.8.2 BaO Cathode Insert Temperature 124 4.8.3 Barium Depletion Model 127 4.8.4 Bulk-Material Insert Life 130 4.8.5 Cathode Poisoning 131 4.9 Keeper Wear and Life 134 4.10 Discharge Behavior and Instabilities 136 4.10.1 Discharge Modes 136 4.10.2 Suppression of Instabilities and Energetic Ion Production 141 4.10.3 Hollow Cathode Discharge Characteristics 143 Problems 146 References 147 5 Ion Thruster Plasma Generators 155 5.1 Introduction 155 5.2 Idealized Ion Thruster Plasma Generator 157 5.3 DC Discharge Ion Thrusters 162 5.3.1 Generalized 0-D Ring-Cusp Ion Thruster Model 164 5.3.2 Magnetic Multipole Boundaries 166 5.3.3 Electron Confinement 167 5.3.4 Ion Confinement at the Anode Wall 170 5.3.5 Neutral and Primary Densities in the Discharge Chamber 174 5.3.6 Ion and Excited Neutral Production 175 5.3.7 Electron Temperature 177 5.3.8 Primary Electron Density 178 5.3.9 Power and Energy Balance in the Discharge Chamber 180 5.3.10 Discharge Loss 182 5.3.11 Discharge Stability 187 5.3.12 Recycling Behavior 189 5.3.13 Limitations of a 0-D Model 192 5.4 Kaufman Ion Thrusters 193 5.5 rf Ion Thrusters 197 5.6 Microwave Ion Thrusters 206 5.7 2-D Models of the Ion Thruster Discharge Chamber 216 5.7.1 Neutral Atom Model 217 5.7.2 Primary Electron Motion and Ionization Model 219 5.7.3 Discharge Chamber Model Results 221 Problems 223 References 225 6 Ion Thruster Accelerators 229 6.1 Grid Configurations 229 6.2 Ion Accelerator Basics 234 6.3 Ion Optics 237 6.3.1 Ion Trajectories 237 6.3.2 Perveance Limits 240 6.3.3 Grid Expansion and Alignment 241 6.4 Electron Backstreaming 243 6.5 High Voltage Considerations 249 6.5.1 Electrode Breakdown 250 6.5.2 Molybdenum Electrodes 251 6.5.3 Carbon-Carbon Composite Materials 253 6.5.4 Pyrolytic Graphite 254 6.5.5 Voltage Hold-off and Conditioning in Ion Accelerators 255 6.6 Ion Accelerator Grid Life 256 6.6.1 Grid Models 257 6.6.2 Barrel Erosion 260 6.6.3 Pits and Groves Erosion 261 Problems 264 References 265 7 Conventional Hall Thrusters 269 7.1 Introduction 269 7.1.1 Discharge Channel with Dielectric Walls (SPT) 270 7.1.2 Discharge Channel with Metallic Walls (TAL) 271 7.2 Operating Principles and Scaling 273 7.2.1 Crossed-field Structure and the Hall Current 273 7.2.2 Ionization Length and Scaling 276 7.2.3 Plasma Potential and Current Distributions 278 7.3 Performance Models 281 7.3.1 Thruster Efficiency Definitions 281 7.3.2 Multiply Charged Ion Correction 284 7.3.3 Dominant Power Loss Mechanisms 285 7.3.4 Electron Temperature 292 7.3.5 Efficiency of Hall Thrusters with Dielectric Walls 294 7.3.6 Efficiency of TAL Thrusters with Metallic Walls 296 7.3.7 Comparison of Conventional Hall Thrusters with Dielectric and Metallic Walls 297 7.4 Discharge Dynamics and Oscillations 298 7.5 Channel Physics and Numerical Modeling 301 7.5.1 Basic Model Equations 301 7.5.1.1 Electron Motion Perpendicular to the Magnetic Field 302 7.5.1.2 Electron Motion Parallel to the Magnetic Field 304 7.5.1.3 Electron Continuity and Energy Conversation 305 7.5.1.4 Heavy Species: Ion and Neutrals 306 7.5.2 Numerical Modeling and Simulations 308 7.5.2.1 Modeling in One Dimension 308 7.5.2.2 Modeling in Multiple Dimensions 311 7.6 Operational Life of Conventional Hall Thrusters 321 Problems 326 References 328 8 Magnetically Shielded Hall Thrusters 337 8.1 Introduction 337 8.2 First Principles of Magnetic Shielding 338 8.3 The Protective Capabilities of Magnetic Shielding 340 8.3.1 Numerical Simulations 340 8.3.2 Laboratory Experiments and Model Validation 341 8.4 Magnetically Shielded Hall Thrusters with Electrically Conducting Walls 349 8.5 Magnetic Shielding in Low Power Hall Thrusters 351 8.6 Final Remarks on Magnetic Shielding in Hall Thrusters 353 References 355 9 Electromagnetic Thrusters 361 9.1 Introduction 361 9.2 Magnetoplasmadynamic Thrusters 361 9.2.1 Self-Field MPD Thrusters 362 9.2.1.1 Idealized Model of the Self-Field MPD Thruster 363 9.2.1.2 Semi-empirical Model of the Self-Field MPD Thrust 368 9.2.2 Applied-Field MPD Thrusters 369 9.2.2.1 Empirical and Semi-empirical Thrust Models 371 9.2.2.2 First-principles Thrust Model 372 9.2.2.3 Lithium Applied-Field MPD Thrusters 374 9.2.3 Onset Phenomenon 376 9.2.3.1 Anode Starvation 379 9.2.3.2 Plasma Instabilities 380 9.2.3.3 Other Onset Effects 380 9.2.4 MPD Thruster Performance Parameters 380 9.3 Ablative Pulsed Plasma Thrusters 382 9.3.1 Thruster Configurations and Performance 383 9.3.1.1 Rectangular Configurations 386 9.3.1.2 Coaxial Configurations 387 9.3.2 Physics and Modeling 389 9.3.2.1 Numerical Simulations 389 9.3.2.2 First-principles Idealized Models 392 9.4 Pulsed Inductive Thrusters (PIT) 395 9.4.1 Thruster Performance 397 9.4.2 Physics and Modeling 398 9.4.2.1 Numerical Simulations 398 9.4.2.2 First-principles Idealized Modeling 402 References 408 10 Future Directions in Electric Propulsion 417 10.1 Hall Thruster Developments 417 10.1.1 Alternative Propellants 417 10.1.2 Nested Channel Hall Thrusters for Higher Power 418 10.1.3 Double Stage Ionization and Acceleration Regions 419 10.1.4 Multipole Magnetic Fields in Hall Thrusters 420 10.2 Ion Thruster Developments 421 10.2.1 Alternative Propellants 421 10.2.2 Grid Systems for High Isp 422 10.3 Helicon Thruster Development 422 10.4 Magnetic Field Dependent Thrusters 424 10.4.1 Rotating Magnetic Field (RMF) Thrusters 424 10.4.2 Magnetic Induction Plasma Thrusters 425 10.4.3 Magnetic Reconnection Thrusters 426 10.5 Laser-Based Propulsion 427 10.6 Solar Sails 427 10.7 Hollow Cathode Discharge Thrusters 428 References 430 11 Electric Thruster Plumes and Spacecraft Interactions 437 11.1 Introduction 437 11.2 Plume Physics in Ion and Hall Thrusters 438 11.2.1 Plume Measurements 439 11.2.2 Flight Data 440 11.2.3 Laboratory Plume Measurements 442 11.3 Plume Models for Ion and Hall Thrusters 443 11.3.1 Primary Beam Expansion 443 11.3.2 Neutral Gas Plumes 447 11.3.3 Secondary Ion Generation 448 11.3.4 Combined Models and Numerical Simulations 450 11.4 Spacecraft Interactions 453 11.4.1 Momentum of the Plume Particles 453 11.4.2 Sputtering and Contamination 454 11.4.3 Plasma Interactions with Solar Arrays 456 11.5 Interactions with Payloads 458 11.5.1 Microwave Phase Shift 458 11.5.2 Plume Plasma Optical Emission 458 Problems 461 References 464 12 Flight Electric Thrusters 467 12.1 Introduction 467 12.2 Ion Thrusters 467 12.3 Hall Thrusters 476 12.4 Electromagnetic Thrusters 480 References 481 Appendix A Nomenclature 487 Appendix B Gas Flow Units Conversions and Cathode Pressure Estimates 497 Appendix C Energy Loss by Electrons 501 Appendix D Ionization and Excitation Cross Sections for Xenon and Krypton 503 Appendix E Ionization and Excitation Reaction Rates in Maxwellian plasmas 509 Appendix F Electron Relaxation and Thermalization Times 511 Appendix G Clausing Factor Monte Carlo Calculation 515 Index 519

Read more less

Book SynopsisA hands-on introduction to FPGA prototyping and SoC design This is the successor edition of the popular FPGA Prototyping by Verilog Examples text. It follows the same learning-by-doing approach to teach the fundamentals and practices of HDL synthesis and FPGA prototyping. The new edition uses a coherent series of examples to demonstrate the process to develop sophisticated digital circuits and IP (intellectual property) cores, integrate them into an SoC (system on a chip) framework, realize the system on an FPGA prototyping board, and verify the hardware and software operation. The examples start with simple gate-level circuits, progress gradually through the RT (register transfer) level modules, and lead to a functional embedded system with custom I/O peripherals and hardware accelerators. Although it is an introductory text, the examples are developed in a rigorous manner, and the derivations follow the strict design guidelines and coding practices used for laTable of ContentsPreface xxvii Acknowledgments xxxiii PART I BASIC DIGITAL CIRCUITS DEVELOPMENT 1 Gate-Level Combinational Circuit 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Brief history of Verilog and SystemVerilog 1 1.1.2 Book coverage 2 1.2 General description 3 1.3 Basic lexical elements and data types 4 1.3.1 Lexical elements 4 1.3.2 Data types used in the book 5 1.3.3 Number representation 6 1.3.4 Operators 7 1.4 Program skeleton 7 1.4.1 Port declaration 7 1.4.2 Signal declaration 8 1.4.3 Program body 8 1.4.4 Concurrent semantics 9 1.4.5 Another example 10 1.5 Structural description 10 1.6 Top-level signal mapping 13 1.7 Testbench 14 1.8 Bibliographic notes 16 1.9 Suggested experiments 16 1.9.1 Code for gate-level greater-than circuit 17 1.9.2 Code for gate-level binary decoder 17 2 Overview of FPGA and EDA Software 19 2.1 FPGA 19 2.1.1 Overview of a general FPGA device 19 2.1.2 Overview of the Xilinx Artix-7 devices 20 2.2 Overview of the Digilent Nexys 4 DDR board 21 2.3 Development flow 22 2.4 Xilinx Vivado Design Suite 24 2.5 Bibliographic notes 24 2.6 Suggested experiments 24 2.6.1 Gate-level greater-than circuit 24 2.6.2 Gate-level binary decoder 26 3 RT-Level Combinational Circuit 29 3.1 Operators 29 3.1.1 Arithmetic operators 31 3.1.2 Shift operators 31 3.1.3 Relational and equality operators 32 3.1.4 Bitwise, reduction, and logical operators 32 3.1.5 Concatenation and replication operators 33 3.1.6 Conditional operators 34 3.1.7 Operator precedence 35 3.1.8 Expression bit-length adjustment 35 3.1.9 Synthesis of z and x values 36 3.2 Always block for a combinational circuit 38 3.2.1 Overview of always block 39 3.2.2 Procedural assignment 40 3.2.3 Conceptual examples 40 3.3 Coding guidelines 43 3.4 If statement 43 3.4.1 Syntax 43 3.4.2 Examples 44 3.5 Case statement 45 3.5.1 Syntax 45 3.5.2 Examples 46 3.5.3 The casez and casex statements 47 3.5.4 Full case and parallel case 48 3.6 Routing structure of conditional control constructs 49 3.6.1 Priority routing network 49 3.6.2 Multiplexing network 51 3.7 Additional coding guidelines for an always block 52 3.7.1 Common errors in combinational circuit codes 52 3.7.2 Guidelines 56 3.8 Parameter and constant 56 3.8.1 Constant 56 3.8.2 Parameter 58 3.9 Replicated structure 59 3.9.1 Generate-for statement 59 3.9.2 Procedural-for statement 60 3.9.3 Example 60 3.10 Design examples 62 3.10.1 Hexadecimal digit to seven-segment LED decoder 62 3.10.2 Sign-magnitude adder 65 3.10.3 Barrel shifter 68 3.10.4 Simplified floating-point adder 69 3.11 Bibliographic notes 73 3.12 Suggested experiments 73 3.12.1 Multi-function barrel shifter 73 3.12.2 Parameterized barrel shifter 74 3.12.3 Dual-priority encoder 74 3.12.4 BCD incrementor 74 3.12.5 Floating-point greater-than circuit 74 3.12.6 Floating-point and signed integer conversion circuit 74 3.12.7 Enhanced floating-point adder 75 4 Regular Sequential Circuit 77 4.1 Introduction 77 4.1.1 D FF and register 78 4.1.2 Basic block system 78 4.1.3 Code development 79 4.1.4 Sequential circuit coding guidelines and style 79 4.2 HDL code of the FF and register 80 4.2.1 D FF 80 4.2.2 Register 85 4.3 Simple design examples 85 4.3.1 Shift register 85 4.3.2 Binary counter and variant 87 4.4 Testbench for sequential circuits 89 4.5 Case study 93 4.5.1 LED time-multiplexing circuit 93 4.5.2 Stopwatch 101 4.6 Timing and clocking 104 4.6.1 Timing of FF 104 4.6.2 Maximum operating frequency 104 4.6.3 Clock tree 107 4.6.4 GALS system and CDC 107 4.7 Bibliographic notes 108 4.8 Suggested experiments 108 4.8.1 Programmable square wave generator 108 4.8.2 PWM and LED dimmer 108 4.8.3 Rotating square circuit 109 4.8.4 Heartbeat circuit 109 4.8.5 Rotating LED banner circuit 109 4.8.6 Enhanced stopwatch 110 5 FSM 111 5.1 Introduction 111 5.1.1 Mealy and Moore outputs 112 5.1.2 FSM representation 112 5.2 FSM code development 115 5.2.1 Enumerated data type and state assignment 115 5.2.2 Multi-segment code 116 5.2.3 Two-segment code 117 5.3 Design examples 118 5.3.1 Rising-edge detector 118 5.3.2 Debouncing circuit 123 5.3.3 Testing circuit 126 5.4 Bibliographic notes 128 5.5 Suggested experiments 128 5.5.1 Dual-edge detector 128 5.5.2 Early detection debouncing circuit 128 5.5.3 Parking lot occupancy counter 129 6 FSMD 131 6.1 Introduction 131 6.1.1 Single RT operation 132 6.1.2 ASMD chart 132 6.1.3 Decision box with a register 134 6.2 Code development of an FSMD 137 6.2.1 Debouncing circuit based on RT methodology 137 6.2.2 Code with explicit data path components 137 6.2.3 Code with implicit data path components 140 6.2.4 Comparison 142 6.3 Design examples 144 6.3.1 Fibonacci number circuit 144 6.3.2 Division circuit 147 6.3.3 Binary-to-BCD conversion circuit 150 6.3.4 Period counter 153 6.3.5 Accurate low-frequency counter 156 6.4 Bibliographic notes 159 6.5 Suggested experiments 159 6.5.1 Early detection debouncing circuit 159 6.5.2 BCD-to-binary conversion circuit 160 6.5.3 Fibonacci circuit with BCD I/O: design approach 1 160 6.5.4 Fibonacci circuit with BCD I/O: design approach 2 160 6.5.5 Auto-scaled low-frequency counter 161 6.5.6 Reaction timer 161 6.5.7 Babbage difference engine emulation circuit 162 7 RAM and Buffer of FPGA 165 7.1 Embedded memory of FPGA device 165 7.1.1 Memory of an Artix device 166 7.1.2 Memory available in the Nexys 4 DDR board 166 7.2 General description for a RAM-like component 167 7.2.1 Register file 167 7.2.2 Dynamic array indexing operation 169 7.2.3 Key aspects of a RAM module 170 7.2.4 Genuine ROM 171 7.3 FIFO buffer 173 7.3.1 FIFO read configuration 174 7.3.2 Circular queue implementation 175 7.4 HDL templates for memory inference 178 7.4.1 Methods to incorporate memory modules 178 7.4.2 Synchronous dual-port RAM 179 7.4.3 “Simple” synchronous dual-port RAM 180 7.4.4 Synchronous single-port RAM 181 7.4.5 Synchronous ROM 182 7.4.6 BRAM-based FIFO buffer 183 7.4.7 Design considerations 183 7.5 Overview of memory controller 184 7.6 Bibliographic notes 185 7.7 Suggested experiments 186 7.7.1 ROM-based sign-magnitude adder 186 7.7.2 ROM-based temperature conversion 186 7.7.3 FIFO with data width conversion 186 7.7.4 Standard FIFO to FWFT FIFO conversion circuit 187 7.7.5 FIFO buffer with extended status 187 7.7.6 Stack 187 8 Selected Topics of SystemVerilog 189 8.1 Timing model 189 8.1.1 Concurrent constructs 190 8.1.2 Assignment statement 190 8.1.3 Basic model 190 8.1.4 Blocking versus nonblocking assignment 192 8.2 Coding guidelines revisited 194 8.2.1 “Single variable assignment” guideline 195 8.2.2 “Blocking assignment for combinational circuit” guideline 195 8.2.3 “Nonblocking assignment for register” guideline 197 8.3 Alternative coding style 198 8.3.1 First coding style revisited 198 8.3.2 Sequential circuit with mixed blocking and nonblocking assignments 199 8.3.3 Combined coding style 201 8.3.4 Summary 206 8.4 Data types 206 8.4.1 The net and variable types 206 8.4.2 The logic data type 207 8.4.3 Limitation of the logic data type 208 8.4.4 New data types in SystemVerilog 208 8.5 Use of the signed data type 209 8.5.1 Overview 209 8.5.2 Signed number conversion 210 8.6 Bibliographic notes 211 8.7 Suggested experiments 211 8.7.1 Shift register with blocking and nonblocking assignments 211 8.7.2 Alternative coding style for the BCD counter 212 8.7.3 Alternative coding style for the FIFO buffer 212 8.7.4 Alternative coding style for the Fibonacci circuit 212 8.7.5 Dual-mode comparator 212 PART II EMBEDDED SOC I: VANILLA FPRO SYSTEM 9 Overview of Embedded SoC Systems 215 9.1 Embedded SoC 215 9.1.1 Overview of embedded systems 215 9.1.2 FPGA-based SoC 216 9.1.3 IP cores 216 9.2 Development flow of the embedded SoC 217 9.2.1 Hardware–software partition 217 9.2.2 Hardware development flow 217 9.2.3 Software development flow 219 9.2.4 Physical implementation and test 219 9.2.5 Custom IP core development 219 9.3 FPro SoC Platform 220 9.3.1 Motivations 220 9.3.2 Platform hardware organization 221 9.3.3 Platform software organization 223 9.3.4 Modified development flow 224 9.4 Adaptation on the Digilent Nexys 4 DDR board 224 9.5 Portability 226 9.5.1 Processor Module and Bridge 226 9.5.2 MMIO subsystem 227 9.5.3 Video subsystem 227 9.6 Organization 228 9.7 Bibliographic notes 228 10 Bare Metal System Software Development 231 10.1 Bare metal system development overview 231 10.1.1 Desktop-like system versus bare metal system 231 10.1.2 Basic embedded program architecture 232 10.2 Memory-mapped I/O 233 10.2.1 Overview 233 10.2.2 Memory alignment 234 10.2.3 I/O register map 234 10.2.4 I/O address space of the FPro system 234 10.3 Direct I/O Register Access 235 10.3.1 Review of C pointer 235 10.3.2 C pointer for I/O register 236 10.4 Robust I/O register access 237 10.4.1 chu_io_map.h and chu_io_map.svh 237 10.4.2 inttypes.h 238 10.4.3 chu_io_rw.h 239 10.5 Techniques for low-level I/O operations 241 10.5.1 Bit manipulation 241 10.5.2 Packing and unpacking 242 10.6 Device Drivers 243 10.6.1 Overview 243 10.6.2 GPO and GPI drivers 243 10.6.3 Timer driver 245 10.6.4 UART driver 247 10.7 FPro utility routines and directory structure 248 10.7.1 Minimal hardware requirements 248 10.7.2 Utility routines 248 10.7.3 Directory structure 251 10.8 Test program 252 10.8.1 IP core verification routine 252 10.8.2 Programming with limited memory 252 10.8.3 Test function integration 252 10.8.4 Test program for the vanilla FPro system 253 10.8.5 Implementation 254 10.9 Bibliographic notes 255 10.10 Suggested experiments 255 10.10.1 Chasing LEDs 255 10.10.2 Collision LEDs 256 10.10.3 Pulse width modulation 256 10.10.4 System time display 256 11 FPro Bus Protocol and MMIO Slot Specification 257 11.1 FPro bus 257 11.1.1 Overview of the bus 257 11.1.2 SoC interconnect 258 11.1.3 FPro bus protocol specification 259 11.2 Interface with the bus 260 11.2.1 Introduction 260 11.2.2 Write interface and decoding 261 11.2.3 Read interface and multiplexing 263 11.2.4 FIFO buffer as an I/O register 264 11.2.5 Timing consideration 265 11.3 MMIO I/O core 266 11.3.1 MMIO slot interface specification 266 11.3.2 Basic MMIO I/O core construction 268 11.3.3 GPO and GPI cores 269 11.4 Timer core development 270 11.4.1 Custom logic 270 11.4.2 Register map 271 11.4.3 Wrapping circuit for the slot interface 271 11.5 MMIO controller 272 11.5.1 chu_io_map.svh file 273 11.5.2 HDL code 273 11.5.3 Vanilla MMIO subsystem 275 11.6 MCS I/O bus and bridge 278 11.6.1 Overview of Xilinx MicroBlaze MCS 278 11.6.2 MicroBlaze MCS I/O bus 278 11.6.3 MCS-to-FPro bridge 279 11.7 Vanilla FPro system construction 281 11.8 Bibliographic notes 282 11.9 Suggested experiments 283 11.9.1 FPro bus with a byte-lane enable signal 283 11.9.2 Seven-segment control with a GPO core 283 11.9.3 GPIO core 283 11.9.4 Blinking-LED core 284 11.9.5 Timer core with a programmable period 284 11.9.6 Timer core with a run-once mode 284 12 UART Core 287 12.1 Introduction 287 12.1.1 Overview of serial communication 287 12.1.2 Overview of the UART 288 12.1.3 Oversampling procedure 288 12.2 UART construction 289 12.2.1 Conceptual design 289 12.2.2 Baud rate generator 290 12.2.3 UART receiver 291 12.2.4 UART transmitter 293 12.2.5 Top-level HDL code 295 12.3 UART core development 296 12.3.1 Register map 296 12.3.2 Wrapping circuit for the slot interface 297 12.4 UART driver 298 12.4.1 Class definition 299 12.4.2 Basic methods 300 12.4.3 ASCII code 301 12.4.4 Display methods 303 12.4.5 Test 305 12.5 Additional project ideas 305 12.5.1 Original serial port 305 12.5.2 Emulated serial port 305 12.5.3 Direct connection 306 12.5.4 USB-to-UART adaptor 306 12.5.5 Wireless adaptor 307 12.6 Bibliographic notes 308 12.7 Suggested experiments 308 12.7.1 UART-controlled chasing LEDs 308 12.7.2 Alternative read configuration 308 12.7.3 UART controller with a parity bit 308 12.7.4 UART core with an error status 309 12.7.5 Configurable UART core 309 12.7.6 UART core with automatic baud rate detection 309 12.7.7 UART core with enhanced automatic baud rate detection 310 12.7.8 UART core with an automatic baud rate and a parity detection circuit 310 PART III EMBEDDED SOC II: BASIC I/O CORES 13 Xilinx XADC Core 313 13.1 Overview of XADC 313 13.1.1 Block diagram 313 13.1.2 Configuration 314 13.2 XADC core development 315 13.2.1 XADC instantiation 315 13.2.2 Basic wrapping circuit design 316 13.2.3 Register map 318 13.2.4 HDL code 318 13.3 XADC core device driver 320 13.3.1 Class definition 320 13.3.2 Class implementation 321 13.3.3 Testing for the XADC core 322 13.4 Sampler FPro system 323 13.4.1 Testing procedure of an FPro core 323 13.4.2 System configuration 323 13.4.3 Hardware derivation 324 13.4.4 Software verification program 331 13.5 Additional project ideas 332 13.6 Bibliographic notes 333 13.7 Suggested experiments 333 13.7.1 Real-time voltage display 333 13.7.2 Potentiometer-controlled chasing LEDs 333 13.7.3 Potentiometer-controlled LED dimmer 333 13.7.4 Enhanced wrapping circuit: part I 333 13.7.5 Enhanced wrapping circuit: part II 333 14 Pulse Width Modulation Core 335 14.1 Introduction 335 14.1.1 PWM as analog output 335 14.1.2 Main characteristics 336 14.2 PWM design 336 14.2.1 Basic design 336 14.2.2 Enhanced design 337 14.3 PWM core development 339 14.3.1 Register map 339 14.3.2 Wrapped PWM circuit 340 14.4 PWM driver 341 14.4.1 Class definition 341 14.4.2 Class implementation 342 14.5 Testing 343 14.6 Project ideas 343 14.7 Suggested experiments 345 14.7.1 Police dash light 345 14.7.2 Rainbow night light 345 14.7.3 Enhanced PWM core: part I 345 14.7.4 Enhanced PWM core: part II 346 14.7.5 Enhanced GPIO core 346 14.7.6 Servo motor driver 346 15 Debouncing Core and LED-Mux Core 347 15.1 Debouncing Core 347 15.1.1 Multi-bit debouncing circuit 347 15.1.2 Register map and the slot wrapping circuit 350 15.1.3 Driver 351 15.1.4 Test 352 15.2 LED-mux core 352 15.2.1 Eight-digit seven-segment LED display multiplexing circuit 352 15.2.2 Register map and the slot wrapping circuit 354 15.2.3 Driver 355 15.2.4 Test 358 15.3 Project ideas 358 15.4 Suggested experiments 360 15.4.1 Area comparison of two debouncing circuits 360 15.4.2 Enhanced debouncing core: part I 360 15.4.3 Enhanced debouncing core: part II 360 15.4.4 Rotating square pattern revisited 360 15.4.5 Heartbeat pattern revisited 360 15.4.6 Stopwatch 360 15.4.7 Enhanced LED-mux core 361 16 SPI Core 363 16.1 Overview 363 16.1.1 Conceptual architecture 364 16.1.2 Multiple-device configuration 364 16.1.3 Basic timing 366 16.1.4 Operation modes 367 16.1.5 Undefined aspects 368 16.2 SPI controller 369 16.2.1 Basic design 369 16.2.2 FSMD construction 370 16.2.3 HDL implementation 370 16.3 SPI core development 374 16.3.1 Register map 374 16.3.2 Wrapping circuit for the slot interface 374 16.4 SPI driver 376 16.4.1 Class definition 376 16.4.2 Class implementation 377 16.5 Test 378 16.5.1 ADXL362 accelerometer 378 16.5.2 Test program 380 16.6 Project ideas 381 16.6.1 SD card 381 16.6.2 TFT LCD module 382 16.7 Bibliographic notes 382 16.8 Suggested experiments 382 16.8.1 Inclination sensing 382 16.8.2 “Tapping” detection 382 16.8.3 ADXL362 C++ class 383 16.8.4 Enhanced SPI controller: part I 383 16.8.5 Enhanced SPI controller: part II 383 16.8.6 “Automatic-read” ADXL362 wrapper: part I 383 16.8.7 “Automatic-read” ADXL362 wrapper: part II 384 16.8.8 Flash memory access 384 16.8.9 SPI slave controller: part I 384 16.8.10 SPI slave controller: part II 385 17 I2C Core 387 17.1 Overview 387 17.1.1 Electrical characteristics 388 17.1.2 Basic bus protocol 388 17.1.3 Basic timing 389 17.1.4 Additional features 390 17.2 I2C controller 391 17.2.1 Basic design 391 17.2.2 Conceptual FSMD construction 391 17.2.3 Output control logic 394 17.2.4 I2C bus clock generation 394 17.2.5 HDL implementation 395 17.3 I2C core development 400 17.3.1 Register map 400 17.3.2 Wrapping circuit for the slot interface 400 17.4 I2C driver 401 17.4.1 Class definition 401 17.4.2 Class implementation 402 17.5 Test 405 17.5.1 ADT7420 temperature sensor 405 17.5.2 Test program 406 17.6 Project idea 406 17.7 Bibliographic notes 407 17.8 Suggested experiments 407 17.8.1 Thermometer 407 17.8.2 ADT7420 C++ class 407 17.8.3 Enhanced I2C core 408 17.8.4 “Automatic-read” ADT7420 wrapper 408 17.8.5 I2C slave controller: part I 408 17.8.6 I2C slave controller: part II 408 18 PS2 Core 409 18.1 Introduction 409 18.1.1 PS2-device-to-host communication protocol and timing 410 18.1.2 Host-to-PS2-device communication protocol and timing 410 18.2 PS2 controller 411 18.2.1 Conceptual design 411 18.2.2 PS2 receiving subsystem 411 18.2.3 PS2 transmitting subsystem 415 18.2.4 Complete PS2 system 419 18.3 PS2 core development 420 18.3.1 Register map 420 18.3.2 Wrapping circuit for the slot interface 421 18.4 PS2 driver 422 18.4.1 Class definition 422 18.4.2 Lower layer methods 422 18.4.3 PS2 initialization routine 423 18.4.4 Keyboard routine 425 18.4.5 Mouse routine 428 18.5 Test 430 18.6 Bibliographic notes 431 18.7 Suggested experiments 431 18.7.1 PS2 receiving subsystem with watchdog timer 431 18.7.2 Keyboard-controlled LED flashing circuit 432 18.7.3 Enhanced keyboard driver routine: part I 432 18.7.4 Enhanced keyboard driver routine: part II 432 18.7.5 Remote-mode mouse driver 432 18.7.6 Scroll-wheel mouse driver 432 19 Sound I: DDFS Core 433 19.1 Introduction 433 19.2 Design and implementation 434 19.2.1 Direct synthesis of a digital waveform 434 19.2.2 Direct synthesis of an unmodulated analog waveform 435 19.2.3 Direct synthesis of a modulated analog waveform 436 19.3 Fixed-point arithmetic 437 19.4 DDFS construction 438 19.5 DAC (digital-to-analog converter) 440 19.5.1 Conceptual design 440 19.5.2 HDL implementation 441 19.6 DDFS core development 442 19.6.1 Register map 442 19.6.2 Wrapping circuit for the slot interface 443 19.7 DDFS driver 444 19.7.1 Class definition 444 19.7.2 Class implementation 445 19.8 Test 447 19.9 Bibliographic notes 448 19.10 Suggested experiments 448 19.10.1 Quadrature phase carrier generation 448 19.10.2 Reduced-size phase-to-amplitude lookup table 448 19.10.3 Additive harmonic synthesis 449 19.10.4 Simple function generator 449 19.10.5 Arbitrary waveform generator 449 19.10.6 Sample-based synthesis 449 20 Sound II: ADSR Core 451 20.1 Introduction 451 20.2 ADSR envelope generator 452 20.2.1 Conceptual FSMD design 453 20.2.2 ASMD chart 453 20.2.3 HDL implementation 455 20.3 ADSR core development 457 20.3.1 Register map 457 20.3.2 Wrapped ADSR circuit 458 20.4 ADSR driver 460 20.4.1 Class definition 460 20.4.2 Configuration methods 461 20.4.3 calc note freq() method 463 20.4.4 play note() method 465 20.5 Test 465 20.6 Project idea 466 20.7 Bibliographic notes 467 20.8 Suggested experiments 467 20.8.1 RTTTL music player 467 20.8.2 ADSR envelope testing 467 20.8.3 Pushbutton piano 467 20.8.4 Keyboard piano 468 20.8.5 Keyboard recorder 468 20.8.6 Real-time mode ADSR generator 468 20.8.7 Real-time mode pushbutton piano 468 20.8.8 Merged DDFS and ADSR core 468 20.8.9 ADSR core with an automatic play FIFO buffer 468 20.8.10 ADSR core for frequency modulation 468 PART IV EMBEDDED SOC III: VIDEO CORES 21 Introduction to the Video System 471 21.1 Introduction to a video display 471 21.1.1 Conceptual video display 471 21.1.2 VGA interface 472 21.2 Stream interface 473 21.2.1 Random-access interface versus stream interface 473 21.2.2 Flow control of the stream interface 473 21.3 VGA synchronization 475 21.3.1 Basic operation of a CRT monitor 475 21.3.2 Horizontal synchronization 476 21.3.3 Vertical synchronization 478 21.3.4 Pixel clock rate 479 21.3.5 VGA synchronization circuit 480 21.4 Bar test-pattern generator 483 21.5 Color-to-grayscale conversion circuit 485 21.6 Demo video system 486 21.7 Advanced video standards 488 21.8 Bibliographic notes 489 21.9 Suggested experiments 489 21.9.1 Horizontal bar test-pattern generator 489 21.9.2 Color channel selection circuit 489 21.9.3 Enhanced color-to-grayscale conversion circuit 489 21.9.4 Square test-pattern generator: part I 489 21.9.5 Square test-pattern generator: part II 489 21.9.6 Square test-pattern generator: part III 490 21.9.7 Square test-pattern generator: part IV 490 22 FPro Video Subsystem 491 22.1 Organization of the video subsystem 491 22.1.1 Overview 491 22.1.2 Video controller 493 22.1.3 HDL of the video controller 494 22.2 FPro video IP core 495 22.2.1 Basic functionality 495 22.2.2 Blending operation 496 22.2.3 Core architecture 498 22.2.4 Alternative core partition 500 22.3 Example video cores 500 22.3.1 Bar test-pattern generator core 500 22.3.2 Color-to-grayscale conversion core 503 22.3.3 “Dummy” core 504 22.4 FPro video synchronization core 504 22.4.1 Line buffer 505 22.4.2 Enhanced video synchronization circuit 508 22.4.3 HDL code 511 22.5 Daisy video subsystem 512 22.5.1 Subsystem overview 512 22.5.2 Interface to the video synchronization core 513 22.5.3 HDL code 513 22.5.4 Timing and performance considerations 517 22.6 Vanilla daisy FPro system 517 22.6.1 Clock management core 518 22.6.2 Updated chu_io_map.svh 519 22.6.3 HDL code 519 22.7 Video driver and test program 521 22.7.1 Updated chu_io_map.h and chu_io_rw.h files 521 22.7.2 GPV core driver 522 22.7.3 Test program 523 22.8 Bibliographic notes 524 22.9 Suggested experiments 525 22.9.1 Color channel selection core 525 22.9.2 Enhanced color-to-grayscale conversion core 525 22.9.3 Square test-pattern generator core 525 22.9.4 Alpha blending circuit 525 22.9.5 “Highlight” core 525 22.9.6 SVGA synchronization core 526 22.9.7 Configurable video synchronization core 526 22.9.8 Pipelined video subsystem 526 23 Sprite Core 527 23.1 Introduction 527 23.2 Basic design 528 23.2.1 Sprite RAM 528 23.2.2 In-region comparison circuit 529 23.3 Mouse pointer core 530 23.3.1 Pointer sprite RAM 530 23.3.2 Pixel generation circuit 531 23.3.3 Top-level design 532 23.4 “Ghost” character core 534 23.4.1 Multiple images and animation 534 23.4.2 Overview of the palette scheme 535 23.4.3 Ghost sprite RAM and the palette circuit 535 23.4.4 Animation timing circuit 537 23.4.5 Pixel generation circuit 537 23.4.6 Top-level design 540 23.5 Sprite core driver and test program 541 23.5.1 Sprite core driver 541 23.5.2 Test program 543 23.6 Bibliographic notes 544 23.7 Suggested experiments 544 23.7.1 Mouse pointer control with PS2 core 544 23.7.2 Emulated ghost core 544 23.7.3 Palette circuit for the mouse pointer sprite 544 23.7.4 Sprite scaling circuit 544 23.7.5 Portrait mode display 545 23.7.6 Multiple-object generation 545 23.7.7 Animation speed control 545 23.7.8 Imitated blinking LED: part I 545 23.7.9 Imitated blinking LED: part II 545 23.7.10 Imitated blinking LED: part III 546 24 On-Screen-Display Core 547 24.1 Introduction to tile graphics 547 24.2 Basic OSD design 549 24.2.1 Text-mode display 549 24.2.2 Font ROM 550 24.2.3 Tile RAM 550 24.2.4 Basic organization 551 24.3 OSD core 552 24.3.1 Font ROM 552 24.3.2 Pixel generation circuit 553 24.3.3 Top-level design 555 24.4 OSD core driver and test program 557 24.4.1 OSD core driver 557 24.4.2 Testing program 558 24.5 Bibliographic notes 559 24.6 Suggested experiments 559 24.6.1 Rotating banner 559 24.6.2 Text console 559 24.6.3 Underline for the cursor 559 24.6.4 Portrait-mode display 560 24.6.5 Font scaling circuit: part I 560 24.6.6 Font scaling circuit: part II 560 24.6.7 Extended font 560 24.6.8 Tile-based ghost core 560 25 VGA Frame Buffer Core 561 25.1 Overview 561 25.2 Frame buffer core 562 25.2.1 FPGA memory consideration 562 25.2.2 Video memory module 562 25.2.3 Address translation 563 25.2.4 Pixel generation circuit 564 25.2.5 Register map 566 25.2.6 Top-level HDL code 566 25.3 Driver and test program 567 25.3.1 Frame buffer core driver 567 25.3.2 Geometrical modeling 568 25.3.3 Test program 570 25.4 Project ideas 570 25.5 Bibliographic notes 572 25.6 Suggested experiments 572 25.6.1 Virtual prototyping board panel 572 25.6.2 Virtual analog wall clock 572 25.6.3 Geometrical model functions 572 25.6.4 Simulated “Etch a Sketch” toy 572 25.6.5 Frame buffer core with 3-bit color depth 573 25.6.6 Frame buffer core with 1-bit color depth 573 25.6.7 QVGA frame buffer core 573 25.6.8 Line drawing hardware accelerator 573 25.6.9 Bidirectional frame buffer access: part I 573 25.6.10 Bidirectional frame buffer access: part II 573 PART V EPILOGUE 26 What’s Next 577 References 581 Appendix A: Tutorials 585 A.1 Overview of Xilinx Vivado IDE 585 A.2 Short tutorial on Vivado hardware development 589 A.2.1 Create a design project 590 A.2.2 Add or create Xilinx IP core instances 591 A.2.3 Add or create HDL design files 591 A.2.4 Add a constraint file 592 A.2.5 Perform synthesis, implementation, and bitstream generation 593 A.2.6 Program an FPGA device 593 A.3 Short tutorial on Vivado simulation 594 A.3.1 Add or create HDL testbench 596 A.3.2 Perform initial simulation 596 A.3.3 Customize waveform display 597 A.4 Tutorial on IP instantiation 597 A.4.1 Dual-clock FIFO core via HDL templates 598 A.4.2 IP Catalog utility 599 A.4.3 Generate a MicroBlaze MCS component 600 A.4.4 XADC IP core 601 A.4.5 Clock management IP core 602 A.5 Short tutorial on FPro system development 604 A.5.1 Derive FPro system hardware 605 A.5.2 Export hardware configuration 605 A.5.3 Derive software 605 A.5.4 Embed elf file into FPGA’s memory module and regenerate bitstream 608 A.5.5 Set up the terminal emulator program 610 A.5.6 Program an FPGA device 610 A.6 Bibliographic notes 611 Topic Index 613

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xvii Acknowledgment xxvii 1 A Comprehensive Study of Security Issues and Research Challenges in Different Layers of Service-Oriented IoT Architecture 1 Ankur O. Bang, Udai Pratap Rao and Amit A. Bhusari 1.1 Introduction and Related Work 2 1.2 IoT: Evolution, Applications and Security Requirements 4 1.2.1 IoT and Its Evolution 5 1.2.2 Different Applications of IoT 5 1.2.3 Different Things in IoT 7 1.2.4 Security Requirements in IoT 8 1.3 Service-Oriented IoT Architecture and IoT Protocol Stack 10 1.3.1 Service-Oriented IoT Architecture 10 1.3.2 IoT Protocol Stack 11 1.3.2.1 Application Layer Protocols 12 1.3.2.2 Transport Layer Protocols 13 1.3.2.3 Network Layer Protocols 15 1.3.2.4 Link Layer and Physical Layer Protocols 16 1.4 Anatomy of Attacks on Service-Oriented IoT Architecture 24 1.4.1 Attacks on Software Service 24 1.4.1.1 Operating System–Level Attacks 24 1.4.1.2 Application-Level Attacks 25 1.4.1.3 Firmware-Level Attacks 25 1.4.2 Attacks on Devices 26 1.4.3 Attacks on Communication Protocols 26 1.4.3.1 Attacks on Application Layer Protocols 26 1.4.3.2 Attacks on Transport Layer Protocols 28 1.4.3.3 Attacks on Network Layer Protocols 28 1.4.3.4 Attacks on Link and Physical Layer Protocols 30 1.5 Major Security Issues in Service-Oriented IoT Architecture 31 1.5.1 Application – Interface Layer 32 1.5.2 Service Layer 33 1.5.3 Network Layer 33 1.5.4 Sensing Layer 34 1.6 Conclusion 35 References 36 2 Quantum and Post-Quantum Cryptography 45 Om Pal, Manoj Jain, B.K. Murthy and Vinay Thakur 2.1 Introduction 46 2.2 Security of Modern Cryptographic Systems 46 2.2.1 Classical and Quantum Factoring of A Large Number 47 2.2.2 Classical and Quantum Search of An Item 49 2.3 Quantum Key Distribution 49 2.3.1 BB84 Protocol 50 2.3.1.1 Proposed Key Verification Phase for BB84 51 2.3.2 E91 Protocol 51 2.3.3 Practical Challenges of Quantum Key Distribution 52 2.3.4 Multi-Party Quantum Key Agreement Protocol 53 2.4 Post-Quantum Digital Signature 53 2.4.1 Signatures Based on Lattice Techniques 54 2.4.2 Signatures Based on Multivariate Quadratic Techniques 55 2.4.3 Hash-Based Signature Techniques 55 2.5 Conclusion and Future Directions 55 References 56 3 Artificial Neural Network Applications in Analysis of Forensic Science 59 K.R. Padma and K.R. Don 3.1 Introduction 60 3.2 Digital Forensic Analysis Knowledge 61 3.3 Answer Set Programming in Digital Investigations 61 3.4 Data Science Processing with Artificial Intelligence Models 63 3.5 Pattern Recognition Techniques 63 3.6 ANN Applications 65 3.7 Knowledge on Stages of Digital Forensic Analysis 65 3.8 Deep Learning and Modelling 67 3.9 Conclusion 68 References 69 4 A Comprehensive Survey of Fully Homomorphic Encryption from Its Theory to Applications 73 Rashmi Salavi, Dr. M. M. Math and Dr. U. P. Kulkarni 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Homomorphic Encryption Techniques 76 4.2.1 Partial Homomorphic Encryption Schemes 77 4.2.2 Fully Homomorphic Encryption Schemes 78 4.3 Homomorphic Encryption Libraries 79 4.4 Computations on Encrypted Data 83 4.5 Applications of Homomorphic Encryption 85 4.6 Conclusion 86 References 87 5 Understanding Robotics through Synthetic Psychology 91 Garima Saini and Dr. Shabnam 5.1 Introduction 91 5.2 Physical Capabilities of Robots 92 5.2.1 Artificial Intelligence and Neuro Linguistic Programming (NLP) 93 5.2.2 Social Skill Development and Activity Engagement 93 5.2.3 Autism Spectrum Disorders 93 5.2.4 Age-Related Cognitive Decline and Dementia 94 5.2.5 Improving Psychosocial Outcomes through Robotics 94 5.2.6 Clients with Disabilities and Robotics 94 5.2.7 Ethical Concerns and Robotics 95 5.3 Traditional Psychology, Neuroscience and Future Robotics 95 5.4 Synthetic Psychology and Robotics: A Vision of the Future 97 5.5 Synthetic Psychology: The Foresight 98 5.6 Synthetic Psychology and Mathematical Optimization 99 5.7 Synthetic Psychology and Medical Diagnosis 99 5.7.1 Virtual Assistance and Robotics 100 5.7.2 Drug Discovery and Robotics 100 5.8 Conclusion 101 References 101 6 An Insight into Digital Forensics: History, Frameworks, Types and Tools 105 G Maria Jones and S Godfrey Winster 6.1 Overview 105 6.2 Digital Forensics 107 6.2.1 Why Do We Need Forensics Process? 107 6.2.2 Forensics Process Principles 108 6.3 Digital Forensics History 108 6.3.1 1985 to 1995 108 6.3.2 1995 to 2005 109 6.3.3 2005 to 2015 110 6.4 Evolutionary Cycle of Digital Forensics 111 6.4.1 Ad Hoc 111 6.4.2 Structured Phase 111 6.4.3 Enterprise Phase 112 6.5 Stages of Digital Forensics Process 112 6.5.1 Stage 1 - 1995 to 2003 112 6.5.2 Stage II - 2004 to 2007 113 6.5.3 Stage III - 2007 to 2014 114 6.6 Types of Digital Forensics 115 6.6.1 Cloud Forensics 116 6.6.2 Mobile Forensics 116 6.6.3 IoT Forensics 116 6.6.4 Computer Forensics 117 6.6.5 Network Forensics 117 6.6.6 Database Forensics 118 6.7 Evidence Collection and Analysis 118 6.8 Digital Forensics Tools 119 6.8.1 X-Ways Forensics 119 6.8.2 SANS Investigative Forensics Toolkit – SIFT 119 6.8.3 EnCase 119 6.8.4 The Sleuth Kit/Autopsy 122 6.8.5 Oxygen Forensic Suite 122 6.8.6 Xplico 122 6.8.7 Computer Online Forensic Evidence Extractor (COFEE) 122 6.8.8 Cellebrite UFED 122 6.8.9 OSForeniscs 123 6.8.10 Computer-Aided Investigative Environment (CAINE) 123 6.9 Summary 123 References 123 7 Digital Forensics as a Service: Analysis for Forensic Knowledge 127 Soumi Banerjee, Anita Patil, Dipti Jadhav and Gautam Borkar 7.1 Introduction 127 7.2 Objective 128 7.3 Types of Digital Forensics 129 7.3.1 Network Forensics 129 7.3.2 Computer Forensics 142 7.3.3 Data Forensics 147 7.3.4 Mobile Forensics 149 7.3.5 Big Data Forensics 154 7.3.6 IoT Forensics 155 7.3.7 Cloud Forensics 157 7.4 Conclusion 161 References 161 8 4S Framework: A Practical CPS Design Security Assessment & Benchmarking Framework 163 Neel A. Patel, Dhairya A. Parekh, Yash A. Shah and Ramchandra Mangrulkar 8.1 Introduction 164 8.2 Literature Review 166 8.3 Medical Cyber Physical System (MCPS) 170 8.3.1 Difference between CPS and MCPS 171 8.3.2 MCPS Concerns, Potential Threats, Security 171 8.4 CPSSEC vs. Cyber Security 172 8.5 Proposed Framework 173 8.5.1 4S Definitions 174 8.5.2 4S Framework-Based CPSSEC Assessment Process 175 8.5.3 4S Framework-Based CPSSEC Assessment Score Breakdown & Formula 181 8.6 Assessment of Hypothetical MCPS Using 4S Framework 187 8.6.1 System Description 187 8.6.2 Use Case Diagram for the Above CPS 188 8.6.3 Iteration 1 of 4S Assessment 189 8.6.4 Iteration 2 of 4S Assessment 195 8.7 Conclusion 200 8.8 Future Scope 201 References 201 9 Ensuring Secure Data Sharing in IoT Domains Using Blockchain 205 Tawseef Ahmed Teli, Rameez Yousuf and Dawood Ashraf Khan 9.1 IoT and Blockchain 205 9.1.1 Public 208 9.1.1.1 Proof of Work (PoW) 209 9.1.1.2 Proof of Stake (PoS) 209 9.1.1.3 Delegated Proof of Stake (DPoS) 210 9.1.2 Private 210 9.1.3 Consortium or Federated 210 9.2 IoT Application Domains and Challenges in Data Sharing 211 9.3 Why Blockchain? 214 9.4 IoT Data Sharing Security Mechanism On Blockchain 216 9.4.1 Double-Chain Mode Based On Blockchain Technology 216 9.4.2 Blockchain Structure Based On Time Stamp 217 9.5 Conclusion 219 References 219 10 A Review of Face Analysis Techniques for Conventional and Forensic Applications 223 Chethana H.T. and Trisiladevi C. Nagavi 10.1 Introduction 224 10.2 Face Recognition 225 10.2.1 Literature Review on Face Recognition 226 10.2.2 Challenges in Face Recognition 228 10.2.3 Applications of Face Recognition 229 10.3 Forensic Face Recognition 229 10.3.1 Literature Review on Face Recognition for Forensics 231 10.3.2 Challenges of Face Recognition in Forensics 233 10.3.3 Possible Datasets Used for Forensic Face Recognition 235 10.3.4 Fundamental Factors for Improving Forensics Science 235 10.3.5 Future Perspectives 237 10.4 Conclusion 238 References 238 11 Roadmap of Digital Forensics Investigation Process with Discovery of Tools 241 Anita Patil, Soumi Banerjee, Dipti Jadhav and Gautam Borkar 11.1 Introduction 242 11.2 Phases of Digital Forensics Process 244 11.2.1 Phase I - Identification 244 11.2.2 Phase II - Acquisition and Collection 245 11.2.3 Phase III - Analysis and Examination 245 11.2.4 Phase IV - Reporting 245 11.3 Analysis of Challenges and Need of Digital Forensics 246 11.3.1 Digital Forensics Process has following Challenges 246 11.3.2 Needs of Digital Forensics Investigation 247 11.3.3 Other Common Attacks Used to Commit the Crime 248 11.4 Appropriateness of Forensics Tool 248 11.4.1 Level of Skill 248 11.4.2 Outputs 252 11.4.3 Region of Emphasis 252 11.4.4 Support for Additional Hardware 252 11.5 Phase-Wise Digital Forensics Techniques 253 11.5.1 Identification 253 11.5.2 Acquisition 254 11.5.3 Analysis 256 11.5.3.1 Data Carving 257 11.5.3.2 Different Curving Techniques 259 11.5.3.3 Volatile Data Forensic Toolkit Used to Collect and Analyze the Data from Device 260 11.5.4 Report Writing 265 11.6 Pros and Cons of Digital Forensics Investigation Process 266 11.6.1 Advantages of Digital Forensics 266 11.6.2 Disadvantages of Digital Forensics 266 11.7 Conclusion 267 References 267 12 Utilizing Machine Learning and Deep Learning in Cybesecurity: An Innovative Approach 271 Dushyant Kaushik, Muskan Garg, Annu, Ankur Gupta and Sabyasachi Pramanik 12.1 Introduction 271 12.1.1 Protections of Cybersecurity 272 12.1.2 Machine Learning 274 12.1.3 Deep Learning 276 12.1.4 Machine Learning and Deep Learning: Similarities and Differences 278 12.2 Proposed Method 281 12.2.1 The Dataset Overview 282 12.2.2 Data Analysis and Model for Classification 283 12.3 Experimental Studies and Outcomes Analysis 283 12.3.1 Metrics on Performance Assessment 284 12.3.2 Result and Outcomes 285 12.3.2.1 Issue 1: Classify the Various Categories of Feedback Related to the Malevolent Code Provided 285 12.3.2.2 Issue 2: Recognition of the Various Categories of Feedback Related to the Malware Presented 286 12.3.2.3 Issue 3: According to the Malicious Code, Distinguishing Various Forms of Malware 287 12.3.2.4 Issue 4: Detection of Various Malware Styles Based on Different Responses 287 12.3.3 Discussion 288 12.4 Conclusions and Future Scope 289 References 292 13 Applications of Machine Learning Techniques in the Realm of Cybersecurity 295 Koushal Kumar and Bhagwati Prasad Pande 13.1 Introduction 296 13.2 A Brief Literature Review 298 13.3 Machine Learning and Cybersecurity: Various Issues 300 13.3.1 Effectiveness of ML Technology in Cybersecurity Systems 300 13.3.2 Machine Learning Problems and Challenges in Cybersecurity 302 13.3.2.1 Lack of Appropriate Datasets 302 13.3.2.2 Reduction in False Positives and False Negatives 302 13.3.2.3 Adversarial Machine Learning 302 13.3.2.4 Lack of Feature Engineering Techniques 303 13.3.2.5 Context-Awareness in Cybersecurity 303 13.3.3 Is Machine Learning Enough to Stop Cybercrime? 304 13.4 ML Datasets and Algorithms Used in Cybersecurity 304 13.4.1 Study of Available ML-Driven Datasets Available for Cybersecurity 304 13.4.1.1 KDD Cup 1999 Dataset (DARPA1998) 305 13.4.1.2 NSL-KDD Dataset 305 13.4.1.3 ECML-PKDD 2007 Discovery Challenge Dataset 305 13.4.1.4 Malicious URL’s Detection Dataset 306 13.4.1.5 ISOT (Information Security and Object Technology) Botnet Dataset 306 13.4.1.6 CTU-13 Dataset 306 13.4.1.7 MAWILab Anomaly Detection Dataset 307 13.4.1.8 ADFA-LD and ADFA-WD Datasets 307 13.4.2 Applications ML Algorithms in Cybersecurity Affairs 307 13.4.2.1 Clustering 309 13.4.2.2 Support Vector Machine (SVM) 309 13.4.2.3 Nearest Neighbor (NN) 309 13.4.2.4 Decision Tree 309 13.4.2.5 Dimensionality Reduction 310 13.5 Applications of Machine Learning in the Realm of Cybersecurity 310 13.5.1 Facebook Monitors and Identifies Cybersecurity Threats with ML 310 13.5.2 Microsoft Employs ML for Security 311 13.5.3 Applications of ML by Google 312 13.6 Conclusions 313 References 313 14 Security Improvement Technique for Distributed Control System (DCS) and Supervisory Control-Data Acquisition (SCADA) Using Blockchain at Dark Web Platform 317 Anand Singh Rajawat, Romil Rawat and Kanishk Barhanpurkar 14.1 Introduction 318 14.2 Significance of Security Improvement in DCS and SCADA 322 14.3 Related Work 323 14.4 Proposed Methodology 324 14.4.1 Algorithms Used for Implementation 327 14.4.2 Components of a Blockchain 327 14.4.3 MERKLE Tree 328 14.4.4 The Technique of Stack and Work Proof 328 14.4.5 Smart Contracts 329 14.5 Result Analysis 329 14.6 Conclusion 330 References 331 15 Recent Techniques for Exploitation and Protection of Common Malicious Inputs to Online Applications 335 Dr. Tun Myat Aung and Ni Ni Hla 15.1 Introduction 335 15.2 SQL Injection 336 15.2.1 Introduction 336 15.2.2 Exploitation Techniques 337 15.2.2.1 In-Band SQL Injection 337 15.2.2.2 Inferential SQL Injection 338 15.2.2.3 Out-of-Band SQL Injection 340 15.2.3 Causes of Vulnerability 340 15.2.4 Protection Techniques 341 15.2.4.1 Input Validation 341 15.2.4.2 Data Sanitization 341 15.2.4.3 Use of Prepared Statements 342 15.2.4.4 Limitation of Database Permission 343 15.2.4.5 Using Encryption 343 15.3 Cross Site Scripting 344 15.3.1 Introduction 344 15.3.2 Exploitation Techniques 344 15.3.2.1 Reflected Cross Site Scripting 345 15.3.2.2 Stored Cross Site Scripting 345 15.3.2.3 DOM-Based Cross Site Scripting 346 15.3.3 Causes of Vulnerability 346 15.3.4 Protection Techniques 347 15.3.4.1 Data Validation 347 15.3.4.2 Data Sanitization 347 15.3.4.3 Escaping on Output 347 15.3.4.4 Use of Content Security Policy 348 15.4 Cross Site Request Forgery 349 15.4.1 Introduction 349 15.4.2 Exploitation Techniques 349 15.4.2.1 HTTP Request with GET Method 349 15.4.2.2 HTTP Request with POST Method 350 15.4.3 Causes of Vulnerability 350 15.4.3.1 Session Cookie Handling Mechanism 350 15.4.3.2 HTML Tag 351 15.4.3.3 Browser’s View Source Option 351 15.4.3.4 GET and POST Method 351 15.4.4 Protection Techniques 351 15.4.4.1 Checking HTTP Referer 351 15.4.4.2 Using Custom Header 352 15.4.4.3 Using Anti-CSRF Tokens 352 15.4.4.4 Using a Random Value for each Form Field 352 15.4.4.5 Limiting the Lifetime of Authentication Cookies 353 15.5 Command Injection 353 15.5.1 Introduction 353 15.5.2 Exploitation Techniques 354 15.5.3 Causes of Vulnerability 354 15.5.4 Protection Techniques 355 15.6 File Inclusion 355 15.6.1 Introduction 355 15.6.2 Exploitation Techniques 355 15.6.2.1 Remote File Inclusion 355 15.6.2.2 Local File Inclusion 356 15.6.3 Causes of Vulnerability 357 15.6.4 Protection Techniques 357 15.7 Conclusion 358 References 358 16 Ransomware: Threats, Identification and Prevention 361 Sweta Thakur, Sangita Chaudhari and Bharti Joshi 16.1 Introduction 361 16.2 Types of Ransomwares 364 16.2.1 Locker Ransomware 364 16.2.1.1 Reveton Ransomware 365 16.2.1.2 Locky Ransomware 366 16.2.1.3 CTB Locker Ransomware 366 16.2.1.4 TorrentLocker Ransomware 366 16.2.2 Crypto Ransomware 367 16.2.2.1 PC Cyborg Ransomware 367 16.2.2.2 OneHalf Ransomware 367 16.2.2.3 GPCode Ransomware 367 16.2.2.4 CryptoLocker Ransomware 368 16.2.2.5 CryptoDefense Ransomware 368 16.2.2.6 CryptoWall Ransomware 368 16.2.2.7 TeslaCrypt Ransomware 368 16.2.2.8 Cerber Ransomware 368 16.2.2.9 Jigsaw Ransomware 369 16.2.2.10 Bad Rabbit Ransomware 369 16.2.2.11 WannaCry Ransomware 369 16.2.2.12 Petya Ransomware 369 16.2.2.13 Gandcrab Ransomware 369 16.2.2.14 Rapid Ransomware 370 16.2.2.15 Ryuk Ransomware 370 16.2.2.16 Lockergoga Ransomware 370 16.2.2.17 PewCrypt Ransomware 370 16.2.2.18 Dhrama/Crysis Ransomware 370 16.2.2.19 Phobos Ransomware 371 16.2.2.20 Malito Ransomware 371 16.2.2.21 LockBit Ransomware 371 16.2.2.22 GoldenEye Ransomware 371 16.2.2.23 REvil or Sodinokibi Ransomware 371 16.2.2.24 Nemty Ransomware 371 16.2.2.25 Nephilim Ransomware 372 16.2.2.26 Maze Ransomware 372 16.2.2.27 Sekhmet Ransomware 372 16.2.3 MAC Ransomware 372 16.2.3.1 KeRanger Ransomware 373 16.2.3.2 Go Pher Ransomware 373 16.2.3.3 FBI Ransom Ransomware 373 16.2.3.4 File Coder 373 16.2.3.5 Patcher 373 16.2.3.6 ThiefQuest Ransomware 374 16.2.3.7 Keydnap Ransomware 374 16.2.3.8 Bird Miner Ransomware 374 16.3 Ransomware Life Cycle 374 16.4 Detection Strategies 376 16.4.1 Unevil 376 16.4.2 Detecting File Lockers 376 16.4.3 Detecting Screen Lockers 377 16.4.4 Connection-Monitor and Connection-Breaker Approach 377 16.4.5 Ransomware Detection by Mining API Call Usage 377 16.4.6 A New Static-Based Framework for Ransomware Detection 377 16.4.7 White List-Based Ransomware Real-Time Detection Prevention (WRDP) 378 16.5 Analysis of Ransomware 378 16.5.1 Static Analysis 379 16.5.2 Dynamic Analysis 379 16.6 Prevention Strategies 380 16.6.1 Access Control 380 16.6.2 Recovery After Infection 380 16.6.3 Trapping Attacker 380 16.7 Ransomware Traits Analysis 380 16.8 Research Directions 384 16.9 Conclusion 384 References 384 Index 389

Read more less

Book SynopsisLearn more about the history, foundations, and applications of fuzzy logic in this comprehensive resource by an academic leader Introduction to Fuzzy Logic delivers a high-level but accessible introduction to the rapidly growing and evolving field of fuzzy logic and its applications. Distinguished engineer, academic, and author James K. Peckol covers a wide variety of practical topics, including the differences between crisp and fuzzy logic, the people and professions who find fuzzy logic useful, and the advantages of using fuzzy logic. While the book assumes a solid foundation in embedded systems, including basic logic design, and C/C++ programming, it is written in a practical and easy-to-read style that engages the reader and assists in learning and retention. The author includes introductions of threshold and perceptron logic to further enhance the applicability of the material contained within. After introducing readers to the topic with a brief description of the history and development of the field, Introduction to Fuzzy Logic goes on to discuss a wide variety of foundational and advanced topics, like: A review of Boolean algebra, including logic minimization with algebraic means and Karnaugh mapsA discussion of crisp sets, including classic set membership, set theory and operations, and basic classical crisp set propertiesA discussion of fuzzy sets, including the foundations of fuzzy sets logic, set membership functions, and fuzzy set propertiesAn analysis of fuzzy inference and approximate reasoning, along with the concepts of containment and entailment and relations between fuzzy subsetsPerfect for mid-level and upper-level undergraduate and graduate students in electrical, mechanical, and computer engineering courses, Introduction to Fuzzy Logic covers topics included in many artificial intelligence, computational intelligence, and soft computing courses. Math students and professionals in a wide variety of fields will also significantly benefit from the material covered in this book.Table of ContentsPreface (1-11) Acknowledgements ( 1 ) About the Author ( 1 ) Introduction Chapter 1 A Brief Introduction and History 1 Introduction 1 Models of Human Reasoning 1 The Early Foundation 2 Building On The Past - From Those Who Laid The Foundation 3 A Learning and Reasoning Taxonomy 4 Rote Learning 4 Learning With a Teacher 5 Learning by Example 5 Analogical or Metaphorical Learning 6 Learning by Problem Solving 6 Learning By Discovery 7 Crisp and Fuzzy Logic 7 Starting To Think Fuzzy 7 History Revisited - Early Mathematics 9 Foundations of Fuzzy Logic 9 Fuzzy Logic And Approximate Reasoning 9 Non-Monotonic Reasoning 11 Sets and Logic 12 Classical Sets 12 Fuzzy Subsets 13 Fuzzy Membership Functions 14 Expert Systems 16 Summary 17 Review questions 17 Chapter 2 A Review of Boolean Algebra 19 Introduction to crisp logic and Boolean Algebra 19 Introduction to algebra 20 Postulates 20 Theorems 23 Getting some practice 24 Getting to work 24 Boolean Algebra 24 Implementation 28 Logic minimization 29 Algebraic Means 29 Karnaugh Maps 30 Applying the K-map 30 2 Variable K-Maps 31 3 Variable K-Maps 32 4 Variable K-Maps 33 Going Backwards 33 Don’t Care Variables 35 Summary 37 Review questions 37 Chapter 3 Crisp Sets and Sets and More Sets 38 Introducing the Basics 38 Introduction to Classic Sets and Set Membership 41 Classic Sets 41 Set Membership 41 Basic Classic Crisp Set Properties 45 Exploring Sets and Set Membership 46 Fundamental Terminology 47 Elementary Vocabulary 47 Classical Set Theory and Operations 49 Classic Set Logic 49 Basic Classical Crisp Set Properties 50 Basic Crisp Applications – A First Step 57 Summary 59 Review questions 60 Chapter 4 Fuzzy Sets and Sets and More Sets 61 Introducing Fuzzy 61 Early Mathematics 62 Foundations of Fuzzy Sets Logic 62 Introducing the Basics 64 Introduction to Fuzzy Sets and Set Membership 66 Fuzzy Subsets and Fuzzy Logic 66 Fuzzy Membership Functions 68 Fuzzy Set Theory and Operations 71 Fundamental Terminology 71 Basic Fuzzy Set Properties and Operations 72 Basic Fuzzy Applications – A First Step 83 A Crisp Activity revisited 83 Fuzzy Imprecision and Membership Functions 86 Linear Membership Functions 87 Curved Membership Functions 90 Summary 95 Review questions 96 Chapter 5 What do You Mean by That? 97 Language, Linguistic Variables, Sets And Hedges 97 Symbols And Sounds To Real World Objects 99 Crisp Sets a Second Look 99 Fuzzy Sets a Second Look 103 Linguistic Variables 103 Membership Functions 105 Hedges 106 Summary 110 Review questions 111 Chapter 6 If There Were Four Philosophers 112 Fuzzy Inference And Approximate Reasoning 112 Equality 113 Containment And Entailment 116 Relations Between Fuzzy Subsets 119 Union and Intersection 119 Conjunction and Disjunction 121 Conditional Relations 125 Composition Revisited 127 Max-Min Composition 128 Max-Product Composition 130 Inference In Fuzzy Logic 137 Summary 140 Review questions 141 Chapter 7 So How Do I Use This Stuff? 142 Introduction 142 Fuzzification and Defuzzification 143 Fuzzification 143 Defuzzification 146 Fuzzy Inference Revisited 147 Fuzzy Implication 148 Fuzzy Inference - Single Premise 149 Max Criterion 150 Mean of Maximum 151 Center of Gravity 152 Fuzzy Inference - Multiple Premises 153 Getting to work - Fuzzy Control and Fuzzy Expert Systems 154 Membership Functions 158 System Behavior 159 Defuzzification Strategy 160 Membership Functions 162 System Behavior 163 Defuzzification Strategy 164 Summary 165 Review questions 166 Chapter 8 I Can Do This Stuff !!! 167 Introduction 167 Applications 167 Design Methodology 168 Executing a Design Methodology 169 Summary 172 Review questions 172 Chapter 9 Moving to Threshold Logic !!! 173 Introduction 173 Threshold Logic 173 Executing a Threshold Logic Design 174 Designing an AND Gate 175 Designing an OR Gate 175 Designing a Fundamental Boolean Function 176 The Downfall of Threshold Logic Design 179 Summary 180 Review Questions 181 Chapter 10 Moving to Perceptron Logic !!! 182 Introduction 182 The Biological Neuron 183 Dissecting the Biological Neuron 184 The Artificial Neuron – A First Step 185 The Perceptron – The Second Step 189 The Basic Perceptron 190 Single and Multilayer Perceptron 192 Bias and Activation Function 193 Learning with Perceptrons – First Step 196 Learning with Perceptrons – The Learning Rule 197 Learning with Perceptrons –Second Step 200 Path of the Perceptron Inputs 201 Testing of the Perceptron 203 Summary 204 Review Questions 205 Appendix A Requirements and Design Specifications 207 Introduction 207 Identifying the requirements 209 Formulating the requirements specification 211 The Environment 212 Characterizing External Entities 212 The System 213 Characterizing the System 214 System Inputs And Outputs 214 Functional View 215 Operational View 215 Technological View 215 Safety, Security, And Reliability 216 The System Design Specification 223 The System 225 Quantifying the System 225 System Requirements Versus System Design Specifications 335 Appendix B Introduction to UML 237 Introduction 237 Use Cases 238 Writing a Use Case 240 Class Diagrams 241 Class Relationships 242 Inheritance or Generalization 242 Interface 243 Containment 243 Aggregation 243 Composition 244 Dynamic Modeling with UML 245 Interaction Diagrams 245 Call and Return 246 Create and Destroy 246 Send 247 Sequence diagrams 247 Fork and join 248 Branch and merge 249 Activity diagram 250 State chart diagrams 251 Events 251 State Machines and State Chart Diagrams 252 UML State Chart Diagrams 252 Transitions 253 Guard Conditions 253 Composite States 254 Sequential States 254 History States 255 Concurrent Substates 255 Data Source / Sink 256 Data Store 256 Preparing for Test 258 Thinking Test 258 Examining the Environment 259 Test Equipment 259 The Eye Diagram 260 Generating the Eye Diagram 260 Interpreting the Eye Diagram 261 Back of the Envelope Examination 262 A First Step Check List 262 Routing and Topology 263 Summary 263 Bibliography Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisEMBEDDED DIGITAL CONTROL WITH MICROCONTROLLERS Explore a concise and practical introduction to implementation methods and the theory of digital control systems on microcontrollers Embedded Digital Control with Microcontrollers delivers expert instruction in digital control system implementation techniques on the widely used ARM Cortex-M microcontroller. The accomplished authors present the included information in three phases. First, they describe how to implement prototype digital control systems via the Python programming language in order to help the reader better understand theoretical digital control concepts. Second, the book offers readers direction on using the C programming language to implement digital control systems on actual microcontrollers. This will allow readers to solve real-life problems involving digital control, robotics, and mechatronics. Finally, readers will learn how to merge the theoretical and practical issuTable of ContentsPreface xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 What is a System? 1 1.2 What is a Control System? 1 1.3 About the Book 3 2 Hardware to be Used in the Book 5 2.1 The STM32 Board 5 2.1.1 General Information 6 2.1.2 Pin Layout 6 2.1.3 Powering and Programming the Board 8 2.2 The STM32 Microcontroller 8 2.2.1 Central Processing Unit 8 2.2.2 Memory 9 2.2.3 Input and Output Ports 10 2.2.4 Timer Modules 10 2.2.5 ADC and DAC Modules 11 2.2.6 Digital Communication Modules 11 2.3 System and Sensors to be Used Throughout the Book 12 2.3.1 The DC Motor 12 2.3.1.1 Properties of the DC Motor 12 2.3.1.2 Pin Layout 13 2.3.1.3 Power Settings 14 2.3.2 The DC Motor Drive Expansion Board 14 2.3.3 Encoder 15 2.3.4 The FT232 Module 17 2.4 Systems and Sensors to be Used in Advanced Applications 17 2.4.1 Systems 17 2.4.2 Sensors 19 2.5 Summary 19 Problems 20 3 Software to be Used in the Book 23 3.1 Python on PC 24 3.1.1 Basic Operations 24 3.1.2 Array and Matrix Operations 25 3.1.3 Loop Operations 26 3.1.4 Conditional Statements 27 3.1.5 Function Definition and Usage 27 3.1.6 File Operations 28 3.1.7 Python Control Systems Library 28 3.2 MicroPython on the STM32 Microcontroller 29 3.2.1 Setting up MicroPython 29 3.2.2 Running MicroPython 31 3.2.3 Reaching Microcontroller Hardware 34 3.2.3.1 Input and Output Ports 34 3.2.3.2 Timers 35 3.2.3.3 ADC 37 3.2.3.4 DAC 39 3.2.3.5 UART 41 3.2.4 MicroPython Control Systems Library 42 3.3 C on the STM32 Microcontroller 43 3.3.1 Creating a New Project in Mbed Studio 44 3.3.2 Building and Executing the Code 45 3.3.3 Reaching Microcontroller Hardware 45 3.3.3.1 Input and Output Ports 46 3.3.3.2 Timers 47 3.3.3.3 ADC 48 3.3.3.4 DAC 50 3.3.3.5 UART 51 3.3.4 C Control Systems Library 53 3.4 Application: Running the DC Motor 53 3.4.1 Hardware Setup 54 3.4.2 Procedure 54 3.4.3 C Code for the System 54 3.4.4 Python Code for the System 57 3.4.5 Observing Outputs 59 3.5 Summary 59 Problems 60 4 Fundamentals of Digital Control 63 4.1 Digital Signals 63 4.1.1 Mathematical Definition 64 4.1.2 Representing Digital Signals in Code 64 4.1.2.1 Representation in Python 65 4.1.2.2 Representation in C 65 4.1.3 Standard Digital Signals 65 4.1.3.1 Unit Pulse Signal 66 4.1.3.2 Step Signal 67 4.1.3.3 Ramp Signal 68 4.1.3.4 Parabolic Signal 68 4.1.3.5 Exponential Signal 69 4.1.3.6 Sinusoidal Signal 71 4.1.3.7 Damped Sinusoidal Signal 71 4.1.3.8 Rectangular Signal 72 4.1.3.9 Sum of Sinusoids Signal 73 4.1.3.10 Sweep Signal 75 4.1.3.11 Random Signal 76 4.2 Digital Systems 77 4.2.1 Mathematical Definition 77 4.2.2 Representing Digital Systems in Code 78 4.2.2.1 Representation in Python 78 4.2.2.2 Representation in C 79 4.2.3 Digital System Properties 79 4.2.3.1 Stability 79 4.2.3.2 Linearity 80 4.2.3.3 Time-Invariance 81 4.3 Linear and Time-Invariant Systems 81 4.3.1 Mathematical Definition 81 4.3.2 LTI Systems and Constant-Coefficient Difference Equations 82 4.3.3 Representing LTI Systems in Code 82 4.3.3.1 MicroPython Control Systems Library Usage 83 4.3.3.2 C Control Systems Library Usage 84 4.3.3.3 Python Control Systems Library Usage 85 4.3.4 Connecting LTI Systems 87 4.3.4.1 Series Connection 87 4.3.4.2 Parallel Connection 88 4.3.4.3 Feedback Connection 89 4.4 The z-Transform and Its Inverse 90 4.4.1 Definition of the z-Transform 90 4.4.2 Calculating the z-Transform in Python 92 4.4.3 Definition of the Inverse z-Transform 92 4.4.4 Calculating the Inverse z-Transform in Python 92 4.5 The z-Transform and LTI Systems 93 4.5.1 Associating Difference Equation and Impulse Response of an LTI System 93 4.5.2 Stability Analysis of an LTI System using z-Transform 95 4.5.3 Stability Analysis of an LTI System in Code 95 4.6 Application I: Acquiring Digital Signals from the Microcontroller, Processing Offline Data 96 4.6.1 Hardware Setup 97 4.6.2 Procedure 97 4.6.3 C Code for the System 97 4.6.4 Python Code for the System 99 4.6.5 Observing Outputs 101 4.7 Application II: Acquiring Digital Signals from the Microcontroller, Processing Real-Time Data 103 4.7.1 Hardware Setup 103 4.7.2 Procedure 103 4.7.3 C Code for the System 104 4.7.4 Python Code for the System 106 4.7.5 Observing Outputs 109 4.8 Summary 109 Problems 109 5 Conversion Between Analog and Digital Forms 111 5.1 Converting an Analog Signal to Digital Form 112 5.1.1 Mathematical Derivation of ADC 112 5.1.2 ADC in Code 114 5.2 Converting a Digital Signal to Analog Form 117 5.2.1 Mathematical Derivation of DAC 117 5.2.2 DAC in Code 118 5.3 Representing an Analog System in Digital Form 120 5.3.1 Pole-Zero Matching Method 121 5.3.2 Zero-Order Hold Equivalent 122 5.3.3 Bilinear Transformation 123 5.4 Application: Exciting and Simulating the RC Filter 124 5.4.1 Hardware Setup 125 5.4.2 Procedure 125 5.4.3 C Code for the System 125 5.4.4 Python Code for the System 127 5.4.5 Observing Outputs 129 5.5 Summary 129 Problems 129 6 Constructing Transfer Function of a System 131 6.1 Transfer Function from Mathematical Modeling 131 6.1.1 Fundamental Electrical and Mechanical Components 132 6.1.2 Constructing the Differential Equation Representing the System 133 6.1.3 From Differential Equation to Transfer Function 133 6.2 Transfer Function from System Identification in Time Domain 134 6.2.1 Theoretical Background 135 6.2.2 The Procedure 135 6.2.3 Data Acquisition by the STM32 Microcontroller 136 6.2.4 System Identification in Time Domain by MATLAB 137 6.3 Transfer Function from System Identification in Frequency Domain 142 6.3.1 Theoretical Background 142 6.3.2 The Procedure 142 6.3.3 System Identification in Frequency Domain by MATLAB 143 6.4 Application: Obtaining Transfer Function of the DC Motor 143 6.4.1 Mathematical Modeling 143 6.4.2 System Identification in Time Domain 146 6.4.3 System Identification in Frequency Domain 147 6.5 Summary 148 Problems 148 7 Transfer Function Based Control System Analysis 151 7.1 Analyzing System Performance 151 7.1.1 Time Domain Analysis 151 7.1.1.1 Transient Response 152 7.1.1.2 Steady-State Error 156 7.1.2 Frequency Domain Analysis 156 7.1.3 Complex Plane Analysis 159 7.1.3.1 Root-Locus Plot 160 7.1.3.2 Nyquist Plot 160 7.2 The Effect of Open-Loop Control on System Performance 163 7.2.1 What is Open-Loop Control? 163 7.2.2 Improving the System Performance by Open-Loop Control 164 7.3 The Effect of Closed-Loop Control on System Performance 167 7.3.1 What is Closed-Loop Control? 167 7.3.2 Improving the System Performance by Closed-Loop Control 170 7.4 Application: Adding Open-Loop Digital Controller to the DC Motor 174 7.4.1 Hardware Setup 175 7.4.2 Procedure 175 7.4.3 C Code for the System 175 7.4.4 Python Code for the System 177 7.4.5 Observing Outputs 178 7.5 Summary 178 Problems 180 8 Transfer Function Based Controller Design 183 8.1 PID Controller Structure 183 8.1.1 The P Controller 184 8.1.2 The PI Controller 184 8.1.3 The PID Controller 185 8.1.4 Parameter Tuning Methods 185 8.1.4.1 The Ziegler–Nichols Method 186 8.1.4.2 The Cohen–Coon Method 186 8.1.4.3 The Chien–Hrones–Reswick Method 186 8.2 PID Controller Design in Python 187 8.2.1 Parameter Tuning 188 8.2.2 Controller Design 188 8.2.2.1 P Controller 188 8.2.2.2 PI Controller 191 8.2.2.3 PID Controller 194 8.2.3 Comparison of the Designed P, PI, and PID Controllers 197 8.3 Lag–Lead Controller Structure 199 8.3.1 Lag Controller 199 8.3.2 Lead Controller 200 8.3.3 Lag–Lead Controller 200 8.4 Lag–Lead Controller Design in MATLAB 201 8.4.1 Control System Designer Tool 201 8.4.2 Controller Design in Complex Plane 203 8.4.2.1 Lag Controller 204 8.4.2.2 Lead Controller 206 8.4.2.3 Lag–Lead Controller 207 8.4.2.4 Comparison of the Designed Lag, Lead, and Lag–Lead Controllers 210 8.4.3 Controller Design in Frequency Domain 211 8.4.3.1 Lag Controller 211 8.4.3.2 Lead Controller 213 8.4.3.3 Lag–Lead Controller 213 8.4.3.4 Comparison of the Designed Lag, Lead, and Lag–Lead Controllers 217 8.5 Application: Adding Closed-Loop Digital Controller to the DC Motor 217 8.5.1 Hardware Setup 217 8.5.2 Procedure 217 8.5.3 C Code for the System 218 8.5.4 Python Code for the System 219 8.5.5 Observing Outputs 220 8.6 Summary 223 Problems 224 9 State-space Based Control System Analysis 227 9.1 State-space Approach 227 9.1.1 Definition of the State 227 9.1.2 Why State-space Representation? 228 9.2 State-space Equations Representing an LTI System 228 9.2.1 Continuous-time State-space Equations 229 9.2.2 Discrete-time State-space Equations 231 9.2.3 Representing Discrete-time State-space Equations in Code Form 231 9.3 Conversion Between State-space and Transfer Function Representations 233 9.3.1 From Transfer Function to State-space Equations 233 9.3.2 From State-space Equations to Transfer Function 235 9.4 Properties of the System from its State-space Representation 236 9.4.1 Time Domain Analysis 236 9.4.2 Stability 237 9.4.3 Controllability 238 9.4.4 Observability 239 9.5 Application: Observing States of the DC Motor in Time 240 9.5.1 Hardware Setup 240 9.5.2 Procedure 240 9.5.3 C Code for the System 240 9.5.4 Python Code for the System 242 9.5.5 Observing Outputs 243 9.6 Summary 243 Problems 244 10 State-space Based Controller Design 247 10.1 General Layout 247 10.1.1 Control Based on State Values 248 10.1.2 Regulator Structure 249 10.1.3 Controller Structure 249 10.1.4 What if States Cannot be Measured Directly? 250 10.2 Regulator and Controller Design via Pole Placement 250 10.2.1 Pole Placement 251 10.2.2 Regulator Design 251 10.2.3 Ackermann’s Formula for the Regulator Gain 251 10.2.4 Controller Design 252 10.2.5 Ackermann’s Formula for the Controller Gain 253 10.3 Regulator and Controller Design in Python 253 10.3.1 Regulator Design 253 10.3.2 Controller Design 256 10.4 State Observer Design 260 10.4.1 Mathematical Derivation 261 10.4.2 Ackermann’s Formula for the Observer Gain 262 10.5 Regulator and Controller Design in Python using Observers 263 10.5.1 Observer Design 263 10.5.2 Observer-Based Regulator Design 264 10.5.3 Observer-Based Controller Design 266 10.6 Application: State-space based Control of the DC Motor 270 10.6.1 Hardware Setup 270 10.6.2 Procedure 271 10.6.3 C Code for the System 271 10.6.4 Python Code for the System 273 10.6.5 Observing Outputs 274 10.7 Summary 275 Problems 275 11 Adaptive Control 279 11.1 What is Adaptive Control? 279 11.2 Parameter Estimation 280 11.3 Indirect Self-Tuning Regulator 283 11.3.1 Feedback ISTR Design 283 11.3.2 Feedback and Feedforward ISTR Design 287 11.4 Model-Reference Adaptive Control 288 11.5 Application: Real-Time Parameter Estimation of the DC Motor 290 11.5.1 Hardware Setup 290 11.5.2 Procedure 291 11.5.3 C Code for the System 291 11.5.4 Observing Outputs 293 11.6 Summary 297 Problems 297 12 Advanced Applications 299 12.1 Nonlinear Control 299 12.1.1 Nonlinear System Identification by MATLAB 299 12.1.2 Nonlinear System Input–Output Example 301 12.1.3 Gain Scheduling Example 302 12.1.4 Flat Systems Example 302 12.1.5 Phase Portraits Example 302 12.2 Optimal Control 302 12.2.1 The Linear Quadratic Regulator 303 12.2.2 Continuous-Time LQR Example 304 12.2.3 LQR for the DC Motor 304 12.3 Robust Control 305 12.4 Distributed Control 306 12.4.1 Hardware and Software Setup 306 12.4.2 Procedure 307 12.5 Auto Dimmer 308 12.5.1 Hardware Setup 308 12.5.2 Procedure 309 12.6 Constructing a Servo Motor from DC Motor 309 12.6.1 Hardware Setup 309 12.6.2 Procedure 310 12.7 Visual Servoing 311 12.7.1 Hardware Setup 312 12.7.2 Procedure 312 12.8 Smart Balance Hoverboard 313 12.8.1 Hardware Setup 313 12.8.2 Procedure 314 12.9 Line Following Robot 314 12.9.1 Hardware Setup 314 12.9.2 Procedure 314 12.10 Active Noise Cancellation 315 12.10.1 Hardware Setup 315 12.10.2 Procedure 316 12.11 Sun Tracking Solar Panel 317 12.11.1 Hardware Setup 317 12.11.2 Procedure 317 12.12 System Identification of a Speaker 318 12.12.1 Hardware Setup 319 12.12.2 Procedure 319 12.13 Peltier Based Water Cooler 321 12.13.1 Hardware Setup 321 12.13.2 Procedure 322 12.14 Controlling a Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 322 12.14.1 Hardware Setup 322 12.14.2 Procedure 323 Appendix A STM32 Board Pin Usage Tables 329 Bibliography 335 Index 339

Read more less

Book SynopsisPractical Power Plant Engineering offers engineers, new to the profession, a guide to the methods of practical design, equipment selection and operation of power and heavy industrial plants as practiced by experienced engineers. The authora noted expert on the topicdraws on decades of practical experience working in a number of industries with ever-changing technologies. This comprehensive book, written in 26 chapters, covers the electrical activities from plant design, development to commissioning. It is filled with descriptive examples, brief equipment data sheets, relay protection, engineering calculations, illustrations, and common-sense engineering approaches. The book explores the most relevant topics and reviews the industry standards and established engineering practices. For example, the author leads the reader through the application of MV switchgear, MV controllers, MCCs and distribution lines in building plant power distribution systems, including calculations of Table of ContentsPreface –Why This Book? vii Acknowledgments xv About the Author xvii 1 Plant from Design to Commissioning 1 2 Plant Key One-Line Diagram 31 3 Switching Equipment 75 4 Designing Plant Layout 107 5 SystemGrounding 121 6 Site and Equipment Grounding 137 7 Plant Lighting 157 8 DC System, UPS 179 9 Plant Power Distribution 191 10 Insulation Coordination, Lightning Protection 209 11 Voltage and Phasing Standards 239 12 Cables and Supporting Equipment 253 13 Power Factor Correction 285 14 Motor Selection 303 15 Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) and Harmonics 321 16 Relay Protection and Coordination 341 17 Plant Automation and Data Networking 379 18 Generation 407 19 Power Dispatch and Control 441 20 Diesel Engine Generator Plant and Standby Power 461 21 Reliability Considerations and Calculations 475 22 Fire Protection 495 23 Corrosion, Cathodic Protection 517 24 Brief Equipment Specifications and Data Sheets 531 25 Solar Power 567 26 Wind Power 599 Index 643

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis practical guide shows, step by step, how to use machine learning to carry out actionable decisions that do not discriminate based on numerous human factors, including ethnicity and gender. The authors examine the many kinds of bias that occur in the field today and provide mitigation strategies that are ready to deploy across a wide range of technologies, applications, and industries.Edited by engineering and computing experts, Mitigating Bias in Machine Learning includes contributions from recognized scholars and professionals working across different artificial intelligence sectors. Each chapter addresses a different topic and real-world case studies are featured throughout that highlight discriminatory machine learning practices and clearly show how they were reduced.Mitigating Bias in Machine Learning addresses: Ethical and Societal Implications of Machine Learning Social Media and Health Information Dissemination

Read more less

Book SynopsisA revised and updated text that explores the fundamentals of the physics of electric power handling systems The revised and updated second edition of Electric Power Principles: Sources, Conversion, Distribution and Use offers an innovative and comprehensive approach to the fundamentals of electric power. The author a noted expert on the topic provides a thorough grounding in electric power systems, with an informative discussion on per-unit normalisations, symmetrical components and iterative load flow calculations. The text covers the most important topics within the power system, such as protection and DC transmission, and examines both traditional power plants and those used for extracting sustainable energy from wind and sunlight. The text explores the principles of electromechanical energy conversion and magnetic circuits and synchronous machines the most important generators of electric power. The book also contains information on power electroniTrade ReviewIt is a must-read book for everyone who feels interested in area of electric power system. This book covers almost every essential item that falls in this area. By reading this book, you can expect to explore all the key components in electric power system, such as energy source, transmission line, protection mechanism, load flow, electric machine, etc. All the key concepts are discussed from fundamental physics and elaborated steps by steps. Real world examples with pictures are given in the right place to visualize the discussed items. Problem sets are included in each chapter to strengthen the learnt concepts. I am quite sure everyone from all levels can follow and understand all the contents without much difficulty. In this second edition, a new chapter on energy storage and some other updated information are added. As a teacher and researcher in power engineering, I would say this book must be one of the best books in this area. Christopher H. T. Lee, Assistant Professor, Nanyang Technological University, SingaporeTable of ContentsPreface xv About the Companion Website xvii 1 Electric Power Systems 1 1.1 Electric Utility Systems 2 1.2 Energy and Power 3 1.2.1 Basics and Units 3 1.3 Sources of Electric Power 5 1.3.1 Heat Engines 5 1.3.2 Power Plants 6 1.3.2.1 Environmental Impact of Burning Fossil Fuels 7 1.3.3 Nuclear Power Plants 8 1.3.4 Hydroelectric Power 9 1.3.5 Wind Turbines 10 1.3.6 Solar Power Generation 12 1.4 Electric Power Plants and Generation 14 1.5 Problems 15 2 AC Voltage, Current, and Power 17 2.1 Sources and Power 17 2.1.1 Voltage and Current Sources 17 2.1.2 Power 18 2.1.3 Sinusoidal Steady State 18 2.1.4 Phasor Notation 19 2.1.5 Real and Reactive Power 19 2.1.5.1 Root Mean Square (RMS) Amplitude 20 2.2 Resistors, Inductors, and Capacitors 20 2.2.1 Reactive Power and Voltage 22 2.2.1.1 Example 22 2.2.2 Reactive Power Voltage Support 22 2.3 Voltage Stability and Bifurcation 23 2.3.1 Voltage Calculation 24 2.3.2 Voltage Solution and Effect of Reactive Power 25 2.4 Problems 26 3 Transmission Lines 33 3.1 Modeling: Telegrapher’s Equations 33 3.1.1 Traveling Waves 35 3.1.2 Characteristic Impedance 35 3.1.3 Power 36 3.1.4 Line Terminations and Reflections 36 3.1.4.1 Examples 37 3.1.4.2 Lightning 38 3.1.4.3 Inductive Termination 39 3.1.5 Sinusoidal Steady State 41 3.2 Problems 44 4 Polyphase Systems 47 4.1 Two-phase Systems 47 4.2 Three-phase Systems 48 4.3 Line–Line Voltages 51 4.3.1 Example: Wye- and Delta-connected Loads 52 4.3.2 Example: Use of Wye–Delta for Unbalanced Loads 53 4.4 Problems 55 5 Electrical and Magnetic Circuits 59 5.1 Electric Circuits 59 5.1.1 Kirchhoff’s Current Law 59 5.1.2 Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law 60 5.1.3 Constitutive Relationship: Ohm’s Law 60 5.2 Magnetic Circuit Analogies 62 5.2.1 Analogy to KCL 62 5.2.2 Analogy to KVL: Magnetomotive Force 62 5.2.3 Analogy to Ohm’s Law: Reluctance 63 5.2.4 Simple Case 64 5.2.5 Flux Confinement 64 5.2.6 Example: C-Core 65 5.2.7 Example: Core with Different Gaps 66 5.3 Problems 66 6 Transformers 71 6.1 Single-phase Transformers 71 6.1.1 Ideal Transformers 72 6.1.2 Deviations from an Ideal Transformer 73 6.1.3 Autotransformers 75 6.2 Three-phase Transformers 76 6.2.1 Example 78 6.2.2 Example: Grounding or Zigzag Transformer 80 6.3 Problems 81 7 Polyphase Lines and Single-phase Equivalents 87 7.1 Polyphase Transmission and Distribution Lines 87 7.1.1 Example 89 7.2 Introduction to Per-unit Systems 90 7.2.1 Normalization of Voltage and Current 90 7.2.2 Three-phase Systems 91 7.2.3 Networks with Transformers 92 7.2.4 Transforming from One Base to Another 92 7.2.5 Example: Fault Study 93 7.2.5.1 One-line Diagram of the Situation 93 7.3 Appendix: Inductances of Transmission Lines 95 7.3.1 Single Wire 95 7.3.2 Mutual Inductance 96 7.3.3 Bundles of Conductors 97 7.3.4 Transposed Lines 98 7.4 Problems 98 8 Electromagnetic Forces and Loss Mechanisms 103 8.1 Energy Conversion Process 103 8.1.1 Principle of Virtual Work 104 8.1.1.1 Example: Lifting Magnet 106 8.1.2 Co-energy 107 8.1.2.1 Example: Co-energy Force Problem 107 8.1.2.2 Electric Machine Model 108 8.2 Continuum Energy Flow 109 8.2.1 Material Motion 110 8.2.2 Additional Issues in Energy Methods 111 8.2.2.1 Co-energy in Continuous Media 111 8.2.2.2 Permanent Magnets 112 8.2.2.3 Energy in the Flux–Current Plane 113 8.2.3 Electric Machine Description 115 8.2.4 Field Description of Electromagnetic Force: The Maxwell Stress Tensor 117 8.2.5 Tying the Maxwell Stress Tensor and Poynting Approaches Together 119 8.2.5.1 Simple Description of a Linear Induction Motor 120 8.3 Surface Impedance of Uniform Conductors 122 8.3.1 Linear Case 123 8.3.2 Iron 125 8.3.3 Magnetization 126 8.3.4 Saturation and Hysteresis 126 8.3.5 Conduction, Eddy Currents, and Laminations 129 8.3.5.1 Complete Penetration Case 129 8.3.6 Eddy Currents in Saturating Iron 131 8.4 Semi-empirical Method of Handling Iron Loss 133 8.5 Problems 136 References 141 9 Synchronous Machines 143 9.1 Round Rotor Machines: Basics 144 9.1.1 Operation with a Balanced Current Source 145 9.1.2 Operation with a Voltage Source 145 9.2 Reconciliation of Models 147 9.2.1 Torque Angles 148 9.3 Per-unit Systems 148 9.4 Normal Operation 149 9.4.1 Capability Diagram 150 9.4.2 Vee Curve 150 9.5 Salient Pole Machines: Two-reaction Theory 151 9.6 Synchronous Machine Dynamics 155 9.7 Synchronous Machine Dynamic Model 155 9.7.1 Electromagnetic Model 156 9.7.2 Park’s Equations 157 9.7.3 Power and Torque 160 9.7.4 Per-unit Normalization 160 9.7.5 Equivalent Circuits 163 9.7.6 Transient Reactances and Time Constants 164 9.8 Statement of Simulation Model 165 9.8.1 Example: Transient Stability 166 9.8.2 Equal Area Transient Stability Criterion 166 9.9 Appendix 1: Transient Stability Code 169 9.10 Appendix 2: Winding Inductance Calculation 172 9.10.1 Pitch Factor 175 9.10.2 Breadth Factor 175 9.11 Problems 177 10 System Analysis and Protection 181 10.1 The Symmetrical Component Transformation 181 10.2 Sequence Impedances 184 10.2.1 Balanced Transmission Lines 184 10.2.2 Balanced Load 185 10.2.3 Possibly Unbalanced Loads 186 10.2.4 Unbalanced Sources 187 10.2.5 Rotating Machines 189 10.2.6 Transformers 189 10.2.6.1 Example: Rotation of Symmetrical Component Currents 190 10.2.6.2 Example: Reconstruction of Currents 191 10.3 Fault Analysis 192 10.3.1 Single Line–Neutral Fault 192 10.3.2 Double Line–Neutral Fault 193 10.3.3 Line–Line Fault 193 10.3.4 Example of Fault Calculations 194 10.3.4.1 Symmetrical Fault 195 10.3.4.2 Single Line–Neutral Fault 195 10.3.4.3 Double Line–Neutral Fault 196 10.3.4.4 Line–Line Fault 197 10.3.4.5 Conversion to Amperes 198 10.4 System Protection 198 10.4.1 Fuses 199 10.5 Switches 199 10.6 Coordination 200 10.6.1 Ground Overcurrent 200 10.7 Impedance Relays 201 10.7.1 Directional Elements 202 10.8 Differential Relays 202 10.8.1 Ground Fault Protection for Personnel 203 10.9 Zones of System Protection 203 10.10 Problems 204 11 Load Flow 211 11.1 Two Ports and Lines 211 11.1.1 Power Circles 212 11.2 Load Flow in a Network 214 11.3 Gauss–Seidel Iterative Technique 216 11.4 Bus Types 217 11.5 Bus Admittance 217 11.5.1 Bus Incidence 217 11.5.2 Example Network 218 11.5.3 Alternative Assembly of Bus Admittance 219 11.6 Newton–Raphson Method for Load Flow 220 11.6.1 Generator Buses 222 11.6.2 Decoupling 222 11.6.3 Example Calculations 223 11.7 Problems 223 11.8 Appendix: Matlab Scripts to Implement Load Flow Techniques 226 11.8.1 Gauss–Seidel Routine 226 11.8.2 Newton–Raphson Routine 228 11.8.3 Decoupled Newton–Raphson Routine 230 12 Power Electronics and Converters in Power Systems 233 12.1 Switching Devices 233 12.1.1 Diodes 234 12.1.2 Thyristors 234 12.1.3 Bipolar Transistors 235 12.2 Rectifier Circuits 236 12.2.1 Full-wave Rectifier 237 12.2.1.1 Full-wave Bridge with Resistive Load 237 12.2.1.2 Phase-control Rectifier 238 12.2.1.3 Phase Control into an Inductive Load 240 12.2.1.4 AC Phase Control 242 12.2.1.5 Rectifiers for DC Power Supplies 242 12.3 DC–DC Converters 243 12.3.1 Pulse Width Modulation 246 12.3.2 Boost Converter 247 12.3.2.1 Continuous Conduction 247 12.3.2.2 Discontinuous Conduction 249 12.3.2.3 Unity Power Factor Supplies 250 12.4 Canonical Cell 251 12.4.1 Bidirectional Converter 251 12.4.2 H-Bridge 252 12.5 Three-phase Bridge Circuits 254 12.5.1 Rectifier Operation 254 12.5.2 Phase Control 257 12.5.3 Commutation Overlap 257 12.5.4 AC Side Current Harmonics 259 12.5.4.1 Power Supply Rectifiers 261 12.5.4.2 PWM Capable Switch Bridge 262 12.6 Unified Power Flow Controller 264 12.7 High-voltage DC Transmission 267 12.8 Basic Operation of a Converter Bridge 268 12.8.1 Turn-on Switch 268 12.8.2 Inverter Terminal 269 12.9 Achieving High Voltage 270 12.10 Problems 271 13 System Dynamics and Energy Storage 277 13.1 Load–Frequency Relationship 277 13.2 Energy Balance 277 13.2.1 Natural Response 278 13.2.2 Feedback Control 279 13.2.3 Droop Control 280 13.2.4 Isochronous Control 281 13.3 Synchronized Areas 282 13.3.1 Area Control Error 282 13.3.2 Synchronizing Dynamics 283 13.3.3 Feedback Control to Drive ACE to Zero 284 13.4 Inverter Connection 285 13.4.1 Overview of Connection 286 13.4.2 Filters 287 13.4.3 Measurement 288 13.4.4 Phase Locked Loop 289 13.4.5 Control Loops 290 13.4.6 Grid-following (Slave) Inverter 291 13.4.7 Grid-forming (Master) Inverter 291 13.4.8 Droop-controlled Inverter 292 13.5 Energy Storage 292 13.5.1 Time Scales 293 13.5.2 Batteries 293 13.5.2.1 Simplest Battery Model 294 13.5.2.2 Diffusion Model 294 13.5.2.3 Model Including State of Charge 295 13.6 Problems 296 14 Induction Machines 299 14.1 Introduction 299 14.2 Induction Machine Transformer Model 301 14.2.1 Operation: Energy Balance 307 14.2.1.1 Simplified Torque Estimation 309 14.2.1.2 Torque Summary 310 14.2.2 Example of Operation 310 14.2.3 Motor Performance Requirements 312 14.2.3.1 Effect of Rotor Resistance 312 14.3 Squirrel-cage Machines 313 14.4 Single-phase Induction Motors 314 14.4.1 Rotating Fields 314 14.4.2 Power Conversion in the Single-phase Induction Machine 315 14.4.3 Starting of Single-phase Induction Motors 316 14.4.3.1 Shaded Pole Motors 317 14.4.3.2 Split-phase Motors 317 14.4.4 Split-phase Operation 318 14.4.4.1 Example Motor 319 14.5 Induction Generators 321 14.6 Induction Motor Control 322 14.6.1 Volts/Hz Control 323 14.6.2 Field-oriented Control 323 14.6.3 Elementary Model 324 14.6.4 Simulation Model 325 14.6.5 Control Model 326 14.6.6 Field-oriented Strategy 327 14.7 Doubly-fed Induction Machines 329 14.7.1 Steady-state Operation 331 14.8 Appendix 1: Squirrel-cage Machine Model 334 14.8.1 Rotor Currents and Induced Flux 334 14.8.2 Squirrel-cage Currents 335 14.9 Appendix 2: Single-phase Squirrel-cage Model 339 14.10 Appendix 3: Induction Machine Winding Schemes 341 14.10.1 Winding Factor for Concentric Windings 344 14.11 Problems 345 References 350 15 DC (Commutator) Machines 351 15.1 Geometry 351 15.2 Torque Production 352 15.3 Back Voltage 353 15.4 Operation 354 15.4.1 Shunt Operation 355 15.4.2 Separately Excited 356 15.4.2.1 Armature Voltage Control 357 15.4.2.2 Field Weakening Control 357 15.4.2.3 Dynamic Braking 358 15.4.3 Machine Capability 358 15.5 Series Connection 359 15.6 Universal Motors 361 15.7 Commutator 362 15.7.1 Commutation Interpoles 362 15.7.2 Compensation 364 15.8 Compound-wound DC Machines 365 15.9 Problems 367 16 Permanent Magnets in Electric Machines 371 16.1 Permanent Magnets 371 16.1.1 Permanent Magnets in Magnetic Circuits 373 16.1.2 Load Line Analysis 373 16.1.2.1 Very Hard Magnets 374 16.1.2.2 Surface Magnet Analysis 375 16.1.2.3 Amperian Currents 376 16.2 Commutator Machines 376 16.2.1 Voltage 378 16.2.2 Armature Resistance 379 16.3 Brushless PM Machines 380 16.4 Motor Morphologies 380 16.4.1 Surface Magnet Machines 380 16.4.2 Interior Magnet, Flux-concentrating Machines 381 16.4.3 Operation 382 16.4.3.1 Voltage and Current: Round Rotor 382 16.4.4 A Little Two-reaction Theory 384 16.4.5 Finding Torque Capability 387 16.4.5.1 Optimal Currents 388 16.4.5.2 Rating 389 16.5 Problems 393 Reference 396 Index 397

Read more less

Book SynopsisMaster the fundamentals of planning, preparing, conducting, and presenting engineering research with this one-stop resource Engineering Research: Design, Methods, and Publication delivers a concise but comprehensive guide on how to properly conceive and execute research projects within an engineering field. Accomplished professional and author Herman Tang covers the foundational and advanced topics necessary to understand engineering research, from conceiving an idea to disseminating the results of the project. Organized in the same order as the most common sequence of activities for an engineering research project, the book is split into three parts and nine chapters. The book begins with a section focused on proposal development and literature review, followed by a description of data and methods that explores quantitative and qualitative experiments and analysis, and ends with a section on project presentation and preparation of scholarly publication.<Table of ContentsAbout the Author xvi Preface xvii Acknowledgments xxiii Part I Overview, Proposal, and Literature Review 1 1 Research Overview 3 1.1 Introduction to Research 3 1.1.1 What Is Research? 3 1.1.1.1 Seeking New Knowledge 3 1.1.1.2 A Systems Viewpoint 4 1.1.1.3 General Characteristics 5 1.1.2 Impacts of Research 7 1.1.2.1 Impacts on Societies 7 1.1.2.2 For Specific Objectives 8 1.1.2.3 Benefits to Student Researchers 9 1.2 Building Blocks of Research 10 1.2.1 Innovative Mind 10 1.2.1.1 Motivations to Research 10 1.2.1.2 Thinking and Research 11 1.2.1.3 Critical Thinking 12 1.2.2 Assumptions and Hypotheses 13 1.2.2.1 Assumptions 13 1.2.2.2 Hypothesis 14 1.2.3 Methodology and Methods 14 1.2.3.1 Methodology 15 1.2.3.2 Methods 15 1.2.3.3 Process 15 1.2.4 Research Community 16 1.2.4.1 Environment 16 1.2.4.2 Ethics 16 1.2.4.3 Funding Sources 17 1.3 Types of Research 18 1.3.1 Basic Research, Applied Research, and R&D 18 1.3.1.1 Basic Research 18 1.3.1.2 Applied Research 19 1.3.1.3 Engineering R&D 20 1.3.2 More Discussion on R&D 24 1.3.2.1 Objectives of Engineering R&D 24 1.3.2.2 Experimental and Empirical Research 25 1.3.2.3 Descriptive, Exploratory, Analytical, and Predictive Research 25 1.3.2.4 Case Study 27 1.4 Validity of Research Results 28 1.4.1 Research Validity 28 1.4.1.1 Concept of Validity 28 1.4.1.2 Internal Validity 29 1.4.1.3 External Validity 30 1.4.2 Assessment and Advance 31 1.4.2.1 To Get Validated 31 1.4.2.2 Considerations of Validities 32 1.4.2.3 Publication and Further Development 33 Summary 35 Exercises 36 References 38 2 Research Proposal Development 43 2.1 Research Initiation 43 2.1.1 Research Proposal 43 2.1.1.1 Form Ideas from Problems 43 2.1.1.2 Idea Evaluation 44 2.1.1.3 Student Research Development 46 2.1.1.4 Proposal, Protocol, Prospectus 47 2.1.2 Hypotheses 48 2.1.2.1 Objective and Hypothesis 48 2.1.2.2 Format of Hypothesis 48 2.1.2.3 Research Based on Hypotheses 49 2.2 Composition of Proposal 50 2.2.1 Key Elements of Proposal 50 2.2.1.1 Proposal Format and Structure 50 2.2.1.2 Research Objectives 51 2.2.1.3 Proposal Summary and Description 52 2.2.1.4 Student Competition and Proposals 53 2.2.2 Other Sections of Proposal 54 2.2.2.1 PI and Team 54 2.2.2.2 Budget Plan 54 2.2.2.3 Supporting Materials 55 2.3 Proposal Development 56 2.3.1 Essential Issues 56 2.3.1.1 Meeting Requirements 56 2.3.1.2 Planning for Outcomes 57 2.3.1.3 Methods Overview 57 2.3.2 Tasks of Development 59 2.3.3 Development Process 62 2.3.3.1 Overall Proposal Development 62 2.3.3.2 Three Key Aspects 62 2.3.3.3 Two-step Development 64 2.4 Evaluation and Revision 65 2.4.1 Evaluation for Success 65 2.4.1.1 Drafting and Revision 65 2.4.1.2 Evaluation Overview 66 2.4.1.3 Evaluation Criteria 67 2.4.2 Self-assessment 68 2.4.2.1 Two Key Factors to Address 68 2.4.2.2 A Review Checklist 69 2.4.2.3 A Simple Evaluation 71 2.5 Considerations For Improvement 72 2.5.1 Paying Attention 72 2.5.1.1 Research Aims 72 2.5.1.2 Detail Level of Proposal 72 2.5.1.3 Other Concerns 73 2.5.1.4 Additional Preparation Tips 73 2.5.2 More Considerations 74 2.5.2.1 Pilot Study 74 2.5.2.2 Cross Disciplinary 74 2.5.2.3 Backup Plan 75 2.5.2.4 Unsuccessful Proposals 76 Summary 77 Exercises 78 References 80 3 Literature Search and Review 85 3.1 Introduction to Literature Review 85 3.1.1 Overview of Literature Review 85 3.1.1.1 What Is Literature Review 85 3.1.1.2 The Formats of Literature Review 85 3.1.2 Purposes of Literature Review 86 3.1.2.1 To Understand Status Quo 86 3.1.2.2 To Learn from Other Professionals 87 3.1.2.3 To Look for New Opportunities 88 3.1.2.4 To Assess Research Methods 89 3.1.2.5 To Justify Proposed Research 90 3.1.3 Keys of Literature Review 90 3.1.3.1 Review Process 90 3.1.3.2 Information Processing 91 3.1.3.3 Focuses and Structure of Review 92 3.1.3.4 Items of Significance 93 3.2 Literature Sources and Search 94 3.2.1 Information and Process 94 3.2.1.1 Search Process 94 3.2.1.2 General Information Sources 95 3.2.1.3 Scholarly Publications 96 3.2.2 Literature Sources 97 3.2.2.1 Scholarly Databases 97 3.2.2.2 Public Domain Internet 97 3.2.2.3 Open Access 99 3.2.2.4 Patents 100 3.2.3 Considerations in Search 103 3.2.3.1 Using Keywords 103 3.2.3.2 Search with Constraints 104 3.2.3.3 Currency of Literature 105 3.2.3.4 When to Stop 107 3.3 Conducting Literature Review 108 3.3.1 Basic Tasks 108 3.3.1.1 Overall Attention 108 3.3.1.2 Organizing Analysis 109 3.3.1.3 Making Good Argument 110 3.3.2 Focal Points 111 3.3.2.1 On Methods 111 3.3.2.2 Exploring Trends 112 3.3.3 Standalone Review Articles 112 3.3.3.1 Review Articles 112 3.3.3.2 To Prepare Review Article 113 3.3.3.3 Structure of Literature Review 114 3.3.4 Writing Considerations 116 3.3.4.1 Professional Tone 116 3.3.4.2 Citation and Format 117 3.3.4.3 Common Concerns 117 Summary 118 Exercises 119 References 121 Part II Quantitative and Qualitative Methods 127 4 Research Data and Method Selection 129 4.1 Data in Research 129 4.1.1 Data Overview 129 4.1.1.1 Data and Research 129 4.1.1.2 Data Management 129 4.1.1.3 Data Science 131 4.1.2 Characteristics of Data 132 4.1.2.1 Data Distributions 133 4.1.2.2 Considerations in Research Data 133 4.1.3 Data Analysis 135 4.1.3.1 Prep to Data Analysis 135 4.1.3.2 Overall Data Analysis 136 4.2 Types of Data 137 4.2.1 Basic Types of Data 137 4.2.1.1 Primary Data 137 4.2.1.2 Secondary Data 137 4.2.1.3 Open Data 139 4.2.2 Quantitative vs. Qualitative Data 140 4.2.2.1 Numerical or Non-numerical Data 140 4.2.2.2 Quality of Quantitative Data 141 4.2.2.3 Reliability of Qualitative Data 141 4.2.3 Scales of Data 142 4.2.3.1 Nominal Data 142 4.2.3.2 Ordinal Data 143 4.2.3.3 Binary Data 143 4.2.3.4 Interval and Ratio Data 144 4.3 Data Collection 144 4.3.1 Data Collection Sampling 144 4.3.1.1 Purpose of Data Sampling 144 4.3.1.2 General Considerations for Sampling 145 4.3.1.3 To Determine Sample Size 146 4.3.2 Probability Sampling Methods 147 4.3.2.1 Simple Sampling 147 4.3.2.2 Systematic Sampling 148 4.3.2.3 Stratified and Cluster Sampling 148 4.3.3 Non-probability Sampling Methods 148 4.3.3.1 Types of Non-probability Sampling 148 4.3.3.2 Characteristics of Non-probability Sampling 150 4.4 Method Selection 151 4.4.1 Selection Factors 151 4.4.1.1 Objective Driven 151 4.4.1.2 Data Based 152 4.4.1.3 Various Process Steps 153 4.4.2 Qualitative and Quantitative 154 4.4.2.1 Qualitative vs. Quantitative 154 4.4.2.2 Induction vs. Deduction 156 4.4.2.3 Method Evaluation 157 4.4.3 Other Considerations 157 4.4.3.1 Knowledge and Preference 157 4.4.3.2 Possibility of Different Methods 158 4.4.3.3 Purposeful Data Selection 159 4.4.3.4 Non-data-related Research 159 Summary 160 Exercises 162 References 164 5 Quantitative Methods and Experimental Research 171 5.1 Statistical Analyses 171 5.1.1 Descriptive Statistical Analysis 171 5.1.1.1 Overview of Statistical Analysis 171 5.1.1.2 Purposes of Descriptive Analysis 172 5.1.1.3 Central Tendency 173 5.1.1.4 Variability 173 5.1.2 Inferential Statistical Analysis 174 5.1.2.1 Characteristics of Inferential Analyses 174 5.1.2.2 Data Association 174 5.1.2.3 Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) 175 5.1.2.4 Regression Analyses 176 5.1.3 Interpretation of Analysis Results 179 5.1.3.1 Hypothesis Testing Process 179 5.1.3.2 Hypothesis Test Results 180 5.1.3.3 Outlier Detection and Exclusion 180 5.1.3.4 Identifying Limitations of Study 181 5.2 Quantitative Research 182 5.2.1 Mathematical Modeling 182 5.2.1.1 Concept of Modeling 182 5.2.1.2 Applications of Math Modeling 183 5.2.2 Optimization 183 5.2.2.1 Concept of Optimization 183 5.2.2.2 Optimization Applications 184 5.2.3 Computer Simulation 185 5.2.3.1 Concept of Simulation 185 5.2.3.2 Common Types of Simulation 186 5.2.3.3 Examples of Simulation 188 5.2.4 New Technologies 189 5.3 Experimental Studies 189 5.3.1 Overview of Experimental Studies 190 5.3.1.1 Basic Elements of Experiments 190 5.3.1.2 Influencing Factors 191 5.3.1.3 Other Considerations 191 5.3.2 Comparative Studies 192 5.3.2.1 Concept of Comparative Studies 192 5.3.2.2 True Experimental Design 193 5.3.2.3 Other Comparative Designs 195 5.4 Factorial Design of Experiment (DOE) 196 5.4.1 Introduction to DOE 196 5.4.1.1 Concept of DOE 196 5.4.1.2 Advantage of DOE 196 5.4.1.3 Two-level Factorial Design 198 5.4.2 Process of DOE Applications 198 5.4.2.1 Overall Procedure 198 5.4.3 Considerations in DOE 201 5.4.3.1 Basic Requirements 201 5.4.3.2 Fractional Factorial Designs 202 Summary 203 Exercises 204 References 206 6 Qualitative Methods and Mixed Methods 213 6.1 Qualitative Research 213 6.1.1 Qualitative Research Basics 213 6.1.1.1 Qualitative Methods Overview 213 6.1.1.2 Methods of Qualitative Analysis 214 6.1.1.3 Concepts and Applications 214 6.1.1.4 Using Qualitative Methods 216 6.1.2 Discussion on Qualitative Analysis 217 6.1.2.1 Qualitative Data and Research 217 6.1.2.2 Reflexive Thinking 218 6.1.2.3 Qualitative Analysis in Engineering 219 6.2 Questionnaire Survey 220 6.2.1 Basics of Survey 220 6.2.1.1 Survey Basics 220 6.2.1.2 Applications of Survey in Engineering 221 6.2.1.3 Structure of a Survey 221 6.2.1.4 Characteristics of Survey Study 222 6.2.2 Questionnaire Development 224 6.2.2.1 Development Tasks 224 6.2.2.2 Preparing Questions 225 6.2.2.3 Rating Scale 226 6.2.2.4 Open-Ended Questions 227 6.2.3 Considerations in Conducting Survey 228 6.2.3.1 Validation 228 6.2.3.2 Anonymity 228 6.2.3.3 Return Rate 228 6.2.3.4 Incentive 229 6.2.4 Data Analysis of Survey Results 229 6.2.4.1 Data Coding 229 6.2.4.2 Types of Data Analysis 230 6.3 Interviews and Observations 231 6.3.1 Interview Studies 231 6.3.1.1 Overview of Interviews 231 6.3.1.2 Types and Characteristics of Interviews 232 6.3.1.3 Considerations in Interviews 232 6.3.1.4 Limitations of Interviews 233 6.3.2 Focus Group Studies 233 6.3.2.1 Objective of Focus Group 233 6.3.2.2 Execution of Focus Group 234 6.3.2.3 Considerations of Focus Group 234 6.3.3 Observational Studies 235 6.3.3.1 Execution of Observational Studies 235 6.3.3.2 Advantages of Observational Studies 235 6.3.3.3 Limitations of Observational Studies 236 6.4 Mixed-Method Approaches 236 6.4.1 Combination of Two Types of Methods 236 6.4.1.1 Characteristics of Mixed Methods 236 6.4.1.2 Considerations for Using Mixed Methods 237 6.4.1.3 Applications of Mixed Method Research 238 6.4.2 Method Integration 240 6.4.2.1 Integration Considerations 240 6.4.2.2 Discussion of Mixed Methods 242 Summary 243 Exercises 245 References 246 Part III Management, Writing, and Publication 253 7 Research Execution and Management 255 7.1 Basics of Project Management 255 7.1.1 Life Cycle of Research Project 255 7.1.1.1 Research Life Cycle 255 7.1.1.2 Main Aspects of Research Project 255 7.1.1.3 Overall Efforts 256 7.1.1.4 Continuous Advance 259 7.1.2 Performance of Research Project 260 7.1.2.1 Performance and Planning 260 7.1.2.2 Execution and Reporting 261 7.1.2.3 Progress Monitoring 262 7.1.2.4 Project Adjustments 262 7.2 Research Administration 265 7.2.1 Overall Functionality 265 7.2.1.1 Goals of Research Administration 265 7.2.1.2 Administration and Support 265 7.2.1.3 Main Research Offices 267 7.2.1.4 Teamwork Between PI and RA 268 7.2.2 Academic Integrity 269 7.2.2.1 Research Misconduct 269 7.2.2.2 Plagiarism 271 7.2.2.3 Conflicts of Interest 271 7.2.2.4 Export Controls 272 7.3 Pre-Award Management 273 7.3.1 Tasks and Funding 273 7.3.1.1 Pre-Award Tasks 273 7.3.1.2 Support to Proposal Development 274 7.3.1.3 Internal Funding 275 7.3.1.4 External Funding Search 275 7.3.1.5 Funding Sources 276 7.3.2 Proposal Development 277 7.3.2.1 Assistance from RA 277 7.3.2.2 Budgeting Considerations 278 7.3.2.3 Proposal Checklists 279 7.3.3 Human Subjects (IRB) 280 7.3.3.1 Human Subjects Related 280 7.3.3.2 IRB Reviews 280 7.4 Post-Award Management 282 7.4.1 Project Acceptance and Set Up 282 7.4.1.1 Award Acceptance 282 7.4.1.2 Project Set Up 282 7.4.1.3 Project Reports 283 7.4.1.4 Project Changes 283 7.4.2 Application of Invention Patents 284 7.4.2.1 Considerations for Patent 284 7.4.2.2 Types of Patent 284 7.4.2.3 Patent Application Process 285 7.4.3 Project Closeout 287 7.4.3.1 Basic Process 287 7.4.3.2 Final Reports 288 7.4.3.3 Other Administrative Tasks 289 Summary 289 Exercises 290 References 292 8 Research Report and Presentation 297 8.1 Introduction to Academic Writing 297 8.1.1 Academic Writing 297 8.1.1.1 Academic Writing Overall 297 8.1.1.2 Requirements of Academic Writing 298 8.1.1.3 Elements and Their Significance 298 8.1.2 Common Types 299 8.1.2.1 Thesis and Dissertation 299 8.1.2.2 Project Report 301 8.1.2.3 Case Study Report 301 8.1.3 Reports and Papers 302 8.1.3.1 Types of Research Articles 302 8.1.3.2 Technical Reports Vs. Scholarly Papers 302 8.2 Elements of Report and Thesis 303 8.2.1 Key Elements 303 8.2.2 Core Elements 308 8.2.3 Supporting Elements 312 8.3 Development of Research Report 315 8.3.1 Process of Write-ups 315 8.3.1.1 Writing Sequence 315 8.3.1.2 Timing and Efforts 316 8.3.1.3 Update and Revision 316 8.3.2 Writing Format 317 8.3.2.1 Common Writing Styles 317 8.3.2.2 Sections and Headings 317 8.3.2.3 Figures and Tables 318 8.3.2.4 Equations and Special Symbols 318 8.3.3 Other Considerations 318 8.3.3.1 Statements and Limitations 319 8.3.3.2 Conciseness and Wording 319 8.3.3.3 Other Tips on Writing Style 321 8.4 Research Presentation 322 8.4.1 Presentation at Conference 322 8.4.1.1 Attending Conferences 322 8.4.1.2 Presentation and Keynote 322 8.4.1.3 Poster Presentation 323 8.4.1.4 Conference Costs 324 8.4.2 Presentation Design 324 8.4.2.1 Number of Slides 325 8.4.2.2 Slide Layout 326 8.4.2.3 Graphics and Fonts 328 8.4.3 Considerations for Presentation 328 8.4.3.1 Practice for Overall Flow 328 8.4.3.2 Professional Presenting 329 8.4.3.3 Q&A Management 330 8.4.3.4 Student’s Projects 330 Summary 331 Exercises 332 References 334 9 Scholarly Paper and Publication 339 9.1 Considerations For Publication 339 9.1.1 To Publish, or Not To Publish 339 9.1.1.1 Possible Outlets 339 9.1.1.2 Objectives of Publications 339 9.1.1.3 Overall Publication Status 340 9.1.1.4 Publication of Industrial R&D 341 9.1.2 Types of Publication 343 9.1.2.1 Types of Journal Papers 343 9.1.2.2 Other Types of Publication 344 9.1.3 Paper Quality 345 9.1.3.1 Basic Requirements for Publication 345 9.1.3.2 Preparation for Reviews 346 9.2 Publication Process 347 9.2.1 Overall Publication Process 347 9.2.1.1 Main Steps 347 9.2.1.2 Copyright Paperwork 349 9.2.2 Peer Review Process 350 9.2.2.1 Peer Review Overview 351 9.2.2.2 Review Process and Ratings 351 9.2.2.3 Characteristics of Peer Review 352 9.2.2.4 Peer Review for Conference 353 9.2.3 Review Comment and Response 353 9.2.3.1 Comments and Recommendations of Reviewers 353 9.2.3.2 Response to Peer Review 354 9.2.3.3 Rejection Handling 355 9.3 Target Scholarly Journals 356 9.3.1 Journal Selection 356 9.3.1.1 Overall Considerations 356 9.3.1.2 Relevance 357 9.3.1.3 Quality Factors 357 9.3.1.4 Publishing Cost 359 9.3.2 Journal Quality Indicators 360 9.3.2.1 JCR Impact Factor 360 9.3.2.2 CiteScore 361 9.3.2.3 Other Indicators 361 9.4 Writing For Publication 362 9.4.1 From Report to Paper 362 9.4.1.1 Additional Revision 362 9.4.1.2 Elements of Research Paper 362 9.4.1.3 Convert Thesis to Paper 363 9.4.1.4 English Writing 364 9.4.2 Abstract 364 9.4.2.1 General Requirements 364 9.4.2.2 Examples for Discussion 365 9.4.2.3 Structured Abstract 365 9.4.2.4 Highlights 367 9.4.2.5 Keywords 368 9.4.3 Other Sections 369 9.4.3.1 Introduction 369 9.4.3.2 Discussion 369 9.4.3.3 Optional Items 370 9.4.4 Publishing Ethics 370 9.4.4.1 Appropriate Citation 370 9.4.4.2 Authorship 371 9.4.4.3 Exclusive Submission 373 9.4.4.4 Publishing COI and IRB 373 Summary 374 Exercises 375 References 376 Epilogue 381 Index 383

Read more less